Home

Hardware Edition - Mitsubishi Electric

image

Contents

1. Lower numbers Higher numbers _ cc i Za Ee ESR EAA ERESEAE eas 244 oO 2 4 et gt t ot 2t atet CN1 168 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Terminal Arrangement 3 FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EX Al TB AC 100V INPUT a AL s T AA i E POWER Lower numbers Higher numbers 24 o 2 com 4 6 com o 2 com 4 6 coms 4 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYR ES TB UL FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT ES TB UL FX 16EYT ESS TB UL FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYS ES TB UL i i FX 16EYR TB Lower numbers Higher numbers P D Cd 24 0 2 jcom 4 6 jcomz o 2 coms 4 6 com4 169 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey GO suoleoljioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI EOIJIN8dS Jo Bui jo sejdwexg s SsN SNOEN 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Installation Work 8 4 Installation Work
2. FX3UC 1PS 5V p When the FX2NC FX3UC extension connector on the right side of the FX3UC 1PS 5V is being used the FX2N FX3U extension block connector on the top is not available FX2NC FX3UC extension block FX2NC FX3UC special function block FX2NC CNV IF FX3UC 1PS 5V When the FX2N FX3U extension block connector on the top of the FX3UC 1PS 5V is being used the FX2NC FX3UC extension connector on the right side is not available 81 N N lobe D 5 o O 5 D suoneaoadg 9aUas SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI eOIJIN8dS 104 Bui Jo sojdwexg s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aeyeg O _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 5 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector 3 5 Connection to peripheral device connecting connector This section explains how to connect and disconnect communication cables for peripheral devices 1 RS 422 When connecting a communication cable align the positioning mark in the cable with the connector notch in the peripheral device Peripheral device connector RS 422 WELSEG FXsec 32MT RUN D Yo 1 2 3 Y4 STOP 5 6 7 Y10 Senne or notch LS Communication cable LNG AANA NNN
3. 32 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 1 Outline 1 6 System Overall Configuration 1 6 System Overall Configuration Products connectable to the FX3Gc PLC are classified into the groups to as shown below For model names of products classified into the and D groups refer to 1 11 Number of occupied I O points and 5 V DC current consumption Main unit B1 Special adapter Analog FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP B2 Special adapter Communication FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP Special extension I O extension F Extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V FX3UC FX2NC Series extension equipment or FX3U FX2N Series extension equipment can be connected 4 Connector conversion adapter FX2NC CNV IF FX3U FX2N Series extension equipment can be connected Connection constructed using only the built in power supply c FX2nc CNV IF FX2NC I O FX3UC Special function FX2N I O FX3U FX2N Special function Range to be covered by main unit Connection when the built in power supply is insufficient FX3U FX2N Series extension c FX3uc 1PS 5V FX3U FX3UC FX2NC FX2NC Special Special FX2N oN I O function function I O A Range to be covered by Range to be main unit covered by c
4. yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg ZA 0A A LA Imo e represents vacant terminals _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 67 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout FX2N 8EYR S ES UL Vertical terminal block Example FX2N 16EX 2 lelelelelololololalcial ed I Cd OOCO0000 X nonan OO000000 00000000 m g O N N a S Se x gt x D gt Sz N IX OX LX OX 9X X FX2N 8EYR S 2X SX X FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX ES UL NOOB WH O OO0000000 NOOB WN Oo OO0000000 Lower Lower number number Cc FXan I6EX Higher Higher number number AONB wrH O OOO000000 NOOR WwWNH O OOO000000 FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYS FX2N 16EYT vA ZA OA L noana wno oo0oo000000 Nona wunNn oO oo0oo000000 Lower Lower number number amp FXan IGEYR FXon 16EYT Higher Higher umber number NOOR wN OOO000000 Nona won oo0oo000000
5. Dedicated relay output Separate reference terminals Commons type 6 ae Dedicated transistor output WO we Dedicated triac output 8 S I O connecting type S Konsumo Ic FX3GC Series Connector 5 y e FX2NC Series Connector on E Classification 2 e FX2N Series Terminal block UA1 UL Dedicated 100 V AC input 7 Co I O connecting type Connector lt lt sm Sa I O connecting type Terminal block FE e e eet Z o D v w S 2 Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 23 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 1 Outline 1 4 List of Products 1 4 List of Products 1 FX3Gc 32MT D J Special adapters 1 Main units off FX2NC I O 6 Extension T G power supply unit FX3U 232ADP MB FX3GC 32MT D SME SION SOS FX3U 485ADP MB FX2NC 16EX FX3U ENET ADP FX2NC 16EX T FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC 16EYT FX3U 4AD ADP Connector 7 7 FX3U 32BL FX2NC 32EYT p FX3U 4DA ADP FX2NC CNV IF FX2NC FX3UC B special function blocks FX3U 3A ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3UC 4AD FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA va FX Series terminal tool it supply unit FX 16E TB zte a HEG RETE L PEA FX 16EYR TB ee FX 16EYT TB GX Works2 FX 16EYS TB FX 30P FX3U 4AD TC ADP Connection to programming 2 FX3GC 32MT DSS Special adapters 1 Main units 6 M FX2nc 1 0 6 extension Blocks G Extension 7 FX3U 232ADP MB FX3GC 32MT DSS a
6. 1 Alternative model setting Model to be programmed Model to be set Priority High gt Low FX3GC PLC FX3GC gt FX3G gt FX1N gt FX2N 1 FX2N is selected when the FX 10P E is used 2 Contents of restrictions e Programming is enabled only for the range of functionality available in the PLC selected as the alternative model such as instructions device ranges and program sizes When the FX 10P E is used the range of functionality is limited to that available in the FX2N PLC e Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters i e memory capacity file register capacity etc e Use a programming tool that can select the FX3G model to program using the built in USB port 224 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 2 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools 1 Built in USB communication The FX3Gc PLC has a built in USB communication port and performs program writing program reading and monitoring at high speed 12 Mbps with a personal computer that supports USB 1 Supported programming tools GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later 2 In programming tools not supporting USB Communication is performed via RS 422 or RS 232C 1 Select FX3G when using a programming tool that does not support the FX3Gc P
7. 2 2 4 Special adapters 1 Analog special adapter FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP OpoweR F V3 COM2 12 V2 COMI Il Vix 24 24 OO00000000 AOOO OCCCCIH mama amaan jeoooooo900 LLL looo00 AOU FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP oJ olo oJ olo oj OV oj oll oj C1 a ofl 3 Oj OL Ol a of Of OC 3 Of 4 OT 2 EE i e represents vacant terminals 70 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout 2 Communication special adapter FX3u 232ADP MB Pin No Signal Name 1 Receive carrier detection 2 Receive data D SUB 9pin male 3 SD TXD Send data 4 ER DTR Data terminal ready Screws to fix 5 SG GND Signal ground RS 232C connector G DR DSR Daae Screw holes 4 40UNC 7 8 9 Not used 9 inch screw thread 1 Data terminal ready uses it as a request to send by the handling of the control line 2 Data set ready uses it as a possible to send by the handling of the control line Pin No Signal Direction Contents side of sending data side of sending data RD side of receiving data Not used LC mosa O RD In side of receiving data moss Notused CO NI DM TY A wy N gt 2 2 5 Power supply unit FX3uUc 1PS 5V Power connector O 1 Red O 2 Black O 3 Ground Green 71
8. CCIE Cont NET 10 H System Image TEL FXCPU CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H P Cancel 41 gt Accessing Host Station oe Select USB anam 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 228 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series Appendix A 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series When monitoring circuits device monitor etc or reading writing programs in an FX3Gc PLC from GX Works2 using the FA transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series make sure to execute the following setting B 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection ae target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 Ba The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed SE 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting Ji 3 Select USB ree Setup Connection PC side I F i An Ss CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet CC IE Field Q Series NET IT PLC der e Board Board Board Bus Board Board al gt 2 com come tra Double click it PLC side I F me PLC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CC IE Field CC IE Field Module H Module Module Master Local Communication le Module Head Module af
9. Equipment requirements and tests _ fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2007 12 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Caution for compliance with EC Directive 1 Installation in Enclosure Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the FX3GC Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller 2 Caution for Analog Products in use The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cables integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between 10 10 in very heavy i
10. Error codes can be checked with the programming tool 10 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC 2 Execute the PLC diagnosis Click Diagnostics PLC Diagnostics on the tool menu and the diagnosis of PLC will start Tr MELSOFT Series GX Works Untitled Project PRG Write MAIN 1 Step Fle P SEET ae ETIE ae MLS i Navigation Ethernet Diagnostics CC IE Control Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics Project MELSECNET Diagnostics C Link Diagnostics Parameter A gt Global Device Comment fa System Monitor Program Setting Online Module Change Pou B Program hae Lad MATRI 3 Check the results of diagnosis Display the following window to check the errors Example one error occurs PLC Diagnostics Connection Channel List Serial Port PLC Module Connection R5 232C System Image Error Information Open the help window of Error Jump Error Help GX Wo rks2 to ch eck th e Status Icon Legend e rro r d eta l Is i Status No Error Step Current Error Year Month Day Time f 6401 Parameter Error 2011 11 29 11 48 14 Major Error A Moderate Error The error in PLC A Minor Error is displayed J Change the window size and position after error jump PLC Panel Monitor Status poe Remote
11. For details on programming refer to the programming manual For the wiring refer to Section 7 3 5 6 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration Interrupt pointer Input number Interruption on Interruption on Interrupt disable control ON or OFF duration of input signal leading edge trailing edge X000 1001 WOOO M8050 X001 1101 1100 M8051 X002 1201 1200 M8052 50 us or more X003 1301 1300 M8053 10 us or more X004 1401 1400 M8054 X005 1501 1500 M8055 50 us or more 5 6 2 Cautions for input interruption 10 us or more 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 124 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 7 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 5 7 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 The PLC main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points For details on programming refer to the programming manual For the wiring refer to Section 7 3 5 7 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals Inp
12. M 8192 B E M 81733 Input X003 pulse catch 1M18193 M 8174 Input X004 pulse catch M 8194 3 2 D M 8175 Input X005 pulse catch z M 8195 JE Not used M 8176 M 8196 D Not used M 8177 M 8197 B 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN M 8198 p M 8199 Communication Port Channel Setting Parallel link channel switch OFF ch1 ON ch2 uonepodsue Kayeq 10 suonnesalg TI N N network channel switch 4 4 The channel is specified by either creating or not creating M8179 in setting program e chi not creating M8179 in setting program e ch2 creating M8179 in setting program G s e s Jequiew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey 237 C Operation of Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8517 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition Corres Corres number ang Operation and function ponalng Aumoer and Operation and function ponding name special name special device device Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction High Speed Counter Up down Counter Monitoring M 8200 C200 M 8246 C246 M 8201 C201 M 8247 C247 M 8202 C202 M 8248 C248 When cooo of 1 phase 2 M 8203 M 8249 C249 input or 2 phase M 8204 l M 8250 C250 Z input counter is in down E mode the corresponding M 8205 M 8251 C251 edo turns ON M 8206 M 8252 C252 OFF Down count operation
13. Version Manufacturer s serial number Contents of version upgrade ae First product Ver 1 40 121 January 2012 Corresponds to FX3G PLC Ver 1 40 Supports the following functions of the FX3U 16CCL M Network parameter Accessing the other station from CC Link Ver 2 00 124 April 2012 Remote device station initialization procedure registration CC Link diagnostics Supports connection of FX3U ENET ADP Special parameter error M8489 and D8489 is added Ver 2 10 134 April 2013 e Supports the IP address change function of FX3U ENET ADP Appendix A 2 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool e GX Works2 English version SWLIDNC GXW2 E is applicable to FX3Gc PLCs from the following versions Select FX3G as the PLC type when creating programs for FX3GC PLC using GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Model name FX3GC PLC version Media model name is Applicable GX Works2 version Remarks shown below Ver 1 40 GX Works2 Ver 1 77F or later Ver 2 00 SWLUIDNC GXW2 E Ver 1 87R or later e FX 30P is applicable to FX3GC PLCs from the following version FX3GC PLC version Applicable FX 30P version Remarks Ver 1 40 FX 30P Ver4 30orlater The IVMC instruction is supported in FX 30P Ver 1 50 or later Appendix A 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable inapplicable programming tools can be used by selecting an alternative PLC model
14. 10 6 3 Error Code List and Action Error code Ex ample 1020 Serial communication error 2 M8438 D8438 When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8060 to D8067 D8438 and D8449 Take action based on the following information PLC operaton Contents of error Action at error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 The head number of unconnected I O device Example When X020 is unconnected 4 o 2 0 BCD conversion value Connu a Device number 10 to 177 Unconnected I O relay numbers are programmed aperadon The PLC continues its operation Modify the program check p 1 Input X 0 Output Y wiring connection or add the appropriate unit block e 1st to 3rd digits Device number e Ath digit I O type 1 input X 0 output Y Example When 1020 is stored in D8060 Inputs X020 and later are unconnected 0000 Lo No error 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3812 3813 3814 3820 3821 3840 PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 0000 Lo 4 No error 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 Parity overrun or framing error Communication character error Communication data sum check error Ethernet communication inverter communication computer link and programming Ensure the parameters are correctly set according to their Communication time out detected applications e N N network parallel l
15. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 3 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Main unit FX2NC Series I O extension blocks FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks special adapter extension power supply unit FX2NC CNV IF FX Series terminal blocks FX2N Series I O extension b
16. Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction MEP instruction MEF instruction OFF OFF nonconducting OFF nonconducting ON ON conducting OFF nonconducting e When writing during RUN with GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later the program is as follows When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps e Errors cannot be detected in write during RUN even in a circuit which causes errors Errors are detected after the PLC is stopped once and then run again 227 UOISJO UONEWWUOJU BOURWOJIOd W SUOI eOIINadS 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq eID dS O m sj pow penuljucosiq G s e s Jequiew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port Appendix A 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor device monitor program reading writing etc in the FX3Gc PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Works2 Communication using the built in USB programming port is disabled when using programming software that cannot select the FX3G or FX3GcC model Appendix A 3 1 Installation of US
17. Refer to 3 2 Installation location 8 4 1 Mounting Removal 1 Mounting method 1 Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC input output devices and terminal blocks 1 2 Align the top side of the DIN rail mounting groove refer to 1 at right 3 Press the product onto the DIN rail refer to 2 at right C12 2 Removal method 1 Turn the power supply OFF 2 Disconnect the wiring and input output cables 3 Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail mounting hook in the posture shown refer to 1 at right 4 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at right refer to 2 at ai right to detach the DIN rail mounting hook from the DIN rail 2 5 Remove the product from the DIN rail sya 1 8 4 2 Input output cable connection The terminal block s CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL 83503 standard Refer to 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector Input output cable Terminal block 170 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Installation Work 8 4 3 Connection to terminal block UNO 1 The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below Model Name Terminal Screw Size FX 16E TB FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB FX 32E TB UL FX 16EX A1 TB 2 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYR ES TB UL FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT ES TB UL M3 5 FX 16EYT ESS TB UL FX 16EYS TB
18. Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 164 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Overview 8 1 Overview UNO A terminal block is used to convert connector type input i Optional cable output terminals into a terminal block a Moreover dedicated input and output terminal blocks user fabricated cable built in element types can be used to receive AC input x signals for conversion to relay transistor triac output types NO SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 Terminal block FX 16E TB gueueg Q WZ g J ki M gt AT TOM 8 S D 5 n m wn 8 1 1 Product configuration Numa Garer Number of Drive 4 Model Name Output Connection Destination Power 9 Input Points os Points Supply LG Connected to sink only input or sink only output transistor output type main unit or I O extension block Be O 16 input points or aZ PAOS 16 output points ES a l D 32 input points Connects directly to PLC input FX2NC OOEYT 4 5 p p FX2N 16EYT C 2 points FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX 4 FX2N 16EX C SUOI EOIIOedS FX 16EX
19. To compare and output the current value of a high speed counter the following two methods are available 1 a Use of comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact comparison instruction Use the comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact comparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting Use these instructions only when high speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained Use the comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change the output contact Y at the same time when the current values of high speed counters change Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ instructions perform comparison and output the comparison results with the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of simultaneously driven instructions as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operat
20. e represents vacant terminals ZA GA EA LA OAT ZA 9A SA EA LA OAH LAt 9A VA CA 68 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout 2 Connector type O FX2N 16EX C D The connector is following places Connector Example FX2N 16EX C pin arrangement z 00 10 20 30 40 50 8 Om l a Rear line Za extension connector Fon 16EX C l 3 8 For input go 9 connector D 5 0 2 Lower Higher Qo number number o D FX2N 16EYT C 4 Connector pin arrangement LF ae S S 20 i a 2 50 O O 70 N lt POWER FXan 16EYT C OS 00 i 10 O 59 D 40 50 60 7O i Lower Higher 6 number number go os FX2N 16EXL C aS fab Connector pin arrangement o 00 10 20 8 l 40 50 60 TO l zS Rear line saz extension CSB O connector a FXon 16EXL C 3 8 3 For input 20 connector ia Lower Higher number number Q 2 e represents vacant terminals Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 69 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout
21. e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 72 Failure to do so may cause electric shock 163 Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 3 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Main unit FX2NC Series I O extension blocks FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks special adapter extension power supply unit FX2NC CNV IF FX Series terminal blocks OIN TAEONY DIN rail or FX2N Series I O extension blocks FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks direct mounting Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the
22. 0 42 us instruction speed ee f Standard mode 0 5 us to several hundred us instruction Applied instructions 3 Extension mode 1 2 us to several hundred us instruction 1 Extension combined 128 points or less seats a number of input points 1 2 lt 3 total number of points is 3 Total points 2 Extension combined Sara aoe ee 128 or less Number of number of output points P input output points 4 Remote I O number of points ia BOIS ores The total number of remote I O points in CC Link and CC Link AnyWireASLINK p AnyWireASLINK must be 128 points or less S U rotakpumberoi 256 points or less points Input rela X000 to X177 npunoutpat The device numbers are octal relay Output relay Y000 to Y177 EEPROM keep M384 to M1535 1152 points Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679 6144 points For initial state EEPROM keep SO to S9 10 points HEE EEPROM keep S10 to S999 990 points 1000 to 4095 3096 points 10ms S TO to T191 192 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec 100 ms for subroutine T192 T199 8 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec interruption subroutine Toe Wms S T200 to T245 46 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec on delay timer 4ms accumulating type EEPROM keep T246 to T249 4 points 0 001 to 32 767 sec 100 ms accumulating type EEPROM keep T250 to T255 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec fms T256 to T319 64 points 0 01 to 327 67 sec 1S bits Up CO to C15 16 points For general Counter TANT Counting from 0 to 32 767 its up EEPROM keep C16 to C199
23. 104 Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny S L FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 3 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail The main unit FX2NC Series I O extension block FX2NC FX3UC Series special function block and FX3U Series special adapter can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide It cannot be installed directly with screws The FX2N Series I O extension block and FX2N FX3U Series special function block can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide and directly mounted 3 3 1 Procedures for installing to and removing from DIN rail 1 Main unit FX2Nc Series I O extension block FX2NC FX3uc Series special function block extension power supply unit FX2NC CNV IF 1 Connect all of the main unit FX2Nc Series I O extension blocks FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks extension power supply unit and FX2NC CNV IF For connecting method refer to Subsection 3 4 3 2 Push the DIN rail mounting hooks 1 of all connected units blocks as shown in the figure on the right A 3 Align the upper side of the DIN rail mounting groove with the DIN rail 2 in the figure on the right 4 Whil
24. 2 Restriction for the number of remote I O points Number of input output occupied points h Number of input output occupied points in remote I O stations in network Total of h CC Link 64 Input output occupied points in remote I O AJ65BTB1 16D 32 points x 2 units AJ65BTB1 16T 32 points 64 points Number of input output occupied points in network h lt 128 points The restriction for the number of input output points is satisfied since the total number of input output occupied points in the network is less than 128 Restriction for the 5 V DC power supply capacity Calculate the 5 V DC power supply capacity of the main unit or extension power supply unit 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side FX3GC 32MT D 400mA b Consumer side FX2NC 16EX 45mA gt BOMA FX2N 64CL M 190mA 420mA FX3U 16CCL M OmA 420mA a Supplier side b Consumer side 400mA 420mA 20mA It is necessary to add an extension power supply unit since the capacity on the consumer side b is 20 mA larger than the capacity on the supplier side a Refer to Subsection 1 13 1 Restriction for the number of connectable units a Special adapter The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 2 communication special adapters and up to 2 analog special adapters There is no problem since this configuration includes only 1 communication special adapter and 1 special analog adapter b Input output
25. Appendix C 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8299 Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP S ompatiog From first product From first product From first product Versions 1st analog special adapter D 0280 mut gata CM Da2 nt deta Ch D 8282 Output data Ch3 Output data Da not used Number of oa times for alae of omen times for Ch1 Number of eee times for a ee times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Number Number of averaging times for D 8287 Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8288 Error status Error status Error status D 8289 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 2nd analog special adapter D 8290 Input data Cv D82 input data Ch D8202 Output dat D8203 Not used Number of averaging times for Ph of averaging times for Ch1 Number of averaging times for ra of oe times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for D 8297 Ch4 1 to 4095 Not used Not used D 8298 Error status Error status Error status D 8299 Model code K1 Model code K2 Model code K50 250 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 3 Analog special adapters special devices gt 5 5 TE Operation and function 32 FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP o 5 a O 1st analog special adapter D 8280 Measured temperature Ch B D 8287 Measured temperature Ch2 g7 D 8282 Measured temperature Ch3 E D8283 Measur
26. D 8218 Code of communication error at Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 slave station No 7 D 8182 Value of Z1 register a D 8219 to D 8279 D 8183 Value of V1 register Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix C 3 for details D 8184 Value of Z2 register D 8280 to D 8289 1st special adapter D 8185 Value of V2 register D 8290 to D 8299 2nd special adapter es hacia Tah D 8300 to D 8328 Number and name D 8178 Refresh range setting D 8187 Value of V3 regist z ae malted Stadt 2 1 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the D 8188 Value of Z4 register F anini ede D 8189 Value of V4 register 3 D 8190 Value of Z5 register z Positioning D18191 Value of V5 register TL D 8192 Value of Z6 register 5 D 8340 Lower Nl el value register efault D 8193 Value of V6 register D 8341 Upper D 8194 Value of Z7 register D 8342 Y000 Bias speed Default 0 D 8195 Value of V7 register z D 8343 Lower Y000 Maximum speed i D 8196 D 8344 Upper Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed a TEE LAN Default 1000 D 8346 Y000 Zero return speed D 8199 D 8347 Default 50000 So ore me miter g a Y000 Acceleration time D 8200 Not used Default 100 D 8201 Current link scan time Y000 Deceleration time D 8349 i D 8202 Maximum link scan time Default 100 D 8203 Number of communication error at D 8350 Y001 Current value register master station
27. FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 6 External wiring precautions UNO 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity N lobe e External Wiring of Sink Output Type e External Wiring of Source Output Type SUOISUBWUIG gueuey GO W O a F D 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads 4 i i i MU When an inductive load is connected connect a diode for commutation in parallel with the load as Be necessary ae The diode for commutation must comply with the following specifications SS n Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Forward current Load current or more 5 3 e External Wiring of Sink Output Type e External Wiring of Source Output Type ep O D Q QO A lt O 5 7 Inductive Inductive load yndjno SUOI EOIJIN9dS 3 Interlock mer For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON 6 simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as Dee
28. For the connection method A refer to Subsection 3 4 2 For the connection method B refer to Subsection 3 4 3 For the connection method C refer to Subsection 3 4 4 For the connection method D refer to Subsection 3 4 5 For the connection method E refer to Subsection 3 4 6 FX2NC FX3uUC FX2NC FX3UC FX2Nn I O extension blocks Special adapter extension blocks extension blocks FX2N FX3u special function blocks Td i fi Ee Main F X3UC FX2NC units 1PS 5V CNV IF Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting method A method B method E method C FX2n I O extension blocks o FX2N FX3u special function blocks Extension cables 2 FXON 65EC FXON 30EC F X2N E E BC L I Connecting Connecting method D method C 1 FX2NC Series I O extension blocks and FX2Nc FX3uc Series special function blocks 2 Do not connect the FX3U 4LC or FX2N 8AD on the right side of the FX2N CNV BC The FX2N CNV BC cannot be secured in this case 3 4 2 Connecting method A Main units and Special adapter connecting 1 Connection procedure 1 Turn off the power Disconnect all the cables connected to the PLC and demount the PLC from the DIN rail For the removal method refer to Section 3 3 2 Remove the special adapter connector cover fig A 3 Slide the special adapter slide lock fig B of the main unit when connecting this product to another special adapter please replace the main unit in
29. Separate PAOA ASAE JY997D52101 Details on the FX3U 128ASL M AnyWireASLINK series 09R731 volume User s Manual master block Manuals for analog temperature control Supplied A Wik oo JY997D51901 Installation Manual product BCommon Sonate FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3uU F X3UC Details on analog special function blocks FX3U 4AD ee Series User s Manual Analog JY997D16701 FX3U 4DA FX3uc 4AD and analog special adapters O9R619 Control Edition FX3uU ADP Analog input temperature input and temperature control When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied y with TAAN JY992D74701 Details on handling the 2 ch analog input special i product User s Guide function block Details on handling the 4 ch analog input special Supplied A with FX3U 4AD JY997D20701 function block i oduc Installation Manual When using refer also to the FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU P FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition 15 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Associated Manuals User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual Model Details on handling the 4 ch analog input special Supplied K with FX3U 4AD ADP JY997D13901 adapter i product User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3uU FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition Details on handling the 4 ch analog input special Supplied A with FX3UC 4AD JY99
30. ms N O 253 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO BOULWJOJIOd W SUOI eOIIN9dS oo S S O oo S S 4 s 9143dq Jeloeds S17 UORONJSU m sj pow penuljuocosiq uoneyodsue Kayeq 10 suonnesalg TI G seje s Jaquew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition D Instruction List D 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No External FX Device 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 RS PRUN ASCI HEX CCD RS2 Floating Point 110 111 112 113 to 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Positioning Control 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 A D D 3 D fo Q Q fe on o 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 ECMP EMOV EADD ESUB EMUL EDIV ESQR INT DSZR TBL ABS ZRN PLSV DRVI DRVA TCMP TZCP TADD TSUB TRD WR a HOUR Function Serial Communication Parallel Run Octal Mode Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Check Code Serial Communication 2 PID Control Loop Floating Point Compare Floating Point Move Floating Point Addition Floating Point Subtraction Floating Point Multiplication Floating Point Division Floating Point Square Root Floating Point to Integer Conversion DOG Search Zero Return B
31. 1 4 9 input output cable Input output connector Power cable Classification Model name Description Single wire Wire color red FX 16E SOO0CAB S STN PLC side A 20 pin connector FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 411 e Flat cables with tube FX 16E 300CAB oe A 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB 5 m 16 4 Input output FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5 m 411 cables a Round multicore cables FX 16E 300CAB R ome Ns A 20 pin connector at both ends FX 16E 500CAB R 5m FX A32E 150CAB 1 5m 164 4 11 Flat cables with tube _ FX A32E 300CAB 3 m 9 10 PLC side Two 20 pin connectors in 16 point units e Terminal block side A dedicated connector FX A32E S00CAB 5 m 16 4 e One common terminal covers 32 input output terminals FX2C I O CON 10 piece set Input output connector for flat cable Jee FX2C I O CON S Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 3 mm AWG22 FX2C I 0 CON SA 5 piece set Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 5 mm AWG20 FX2NC 100MPCB 1 m 3 3 Power cable for main unit Power cable FX2NC 100BPCB 1 m 3 3 Input power cable for FX2NC Series input extension blocks FX2NC 10BPCB1 0 1 m 0 3 Input power crossover cable for FX2NC Series input extension blocks 1 4 10 Power supply unit Model name Drive power supply Current Capacity DC FX2N 20PSU 24 V DC power supply 100 to 240 V AC 24VDC2A 1 4 11 Programming tool The following programming tool support
32. 60 kHz Number of positioned axes Number of positioned axes Oo 2 count C247 C248 C249 10 KH Number of pulse width cycle x 5 kHz Number of pulse width cycle S S input C250 measurement inputs x 40 kHz measurement inputs x 20 kHz V o O O 2 phase C251 C253 OP 30 kHz 22 2 count C252 C253 C254 input C254 OP C255 emma 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions Os PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC 59 DSZR FNC150 TBL FNC152 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 ge DRVI FNC158 DRVA FNC159 S 2 Calculation of overall frequency Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression indino Overall frequency gt Sum of used frequency of 1 phase counters Sum of used frequency of 2 D phase counters 8 3 Example of calculation k SANDE SONOS NO 7 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 and DRVA instruction Y001 are used S35 Overall frequency 200 kHz 2 axes x 40 kHz 120 kHz ai lt Counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 count input 50 kHz is input 8 C236 1 phase 1 count input 50 kHz is input D C237 1 phase 1 count input 10 kHz is input 5 C253 2 phase 2 count input 5 kHz is input S Total 115 kHz lt 120 kHz Overall frequency i Example2 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction Y000 are used Number
33. 8 Write protection 7 7 H 11 8 Read write protection ed Z 7 EAMA 6 Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status 7 indicates areas used by the system H 20 7 Keyword cancel 243 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO Ww O O h O O gt N 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds sj pow penuljuocosiq uonewodsue Kayeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s Jequew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and Correspond Content of register ing special Content of register ing special device TEIE device N N Network setting D 8211 Code of communication error at D 8170 master station D 8171 Not used D 8212 Code of communication error at D 8172 slave station No 1 D 8213 Code of communication error at D 8173 Station number slave station No 2 D 8174 Total number of slave stations Ben Code of communication error at D 8175 Refresh range slave station No 3 M8183 to D 8176 Station number setting D 8215 rit a oO error at M8191 D 8177 Total slave station number setting Slave station INO M8038 D 8216 Code of communication error at slave station No 5 D 8179 Retry count setting D 8217 Code of communication error at D 8180 Comms time out setting slave station No 6 D 8181 Not used
34. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 1ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON 245 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO SOULWIOJIOd W Ww O O h O O gt N 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds m sj pow penuljuocosiq uonewodsue Kayeq 10 suonnesalg TI G jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and name Correspond ing special device Content of register RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D 8420 D 8421 D 8422 1 D 8423 D 8424 D 8425 D 8426 D 8427 D 8428 D 8429 D 8430 D 8431 D 8432 D 8433 D 8434 D 8435 D 8436 D 8437 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Communication format setting Computer link ch2 Station number setting RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Remaining points of transmit data RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Monitoring receive data points M8422 M8423 Not used z Communication parameter display ch2 Not used Computer link ch2 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch2 Specification of on demand data MNAO T M8429 length register RS2 FNC 87 ch2 computer link ch2 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 1 and
35. Do not take input signals from loads T if generating surge sem Input FE i terminal Bone FX2N 8EX UA1 UL zoe 2 9 1 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc 8 2 Class D grounding g The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less S 3 Use a fuse suitable for the system o Q WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Aayeg e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 113 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 High speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs and offer counting up to 60kHz 1 phase Input terminals not used for high speed counters are available for general purpose inputs For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit refer to Section 5 2 5 5 1 High speed counter type and device number 1 High speed counter type The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input These high speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters according to counting method 2 High speed counter type and input signal form The types and input signals waveforms of high
36. FX 16EYS ES TB UL 2 A Z 2 Crimp terminal sizes vary according to the wiring method a Use the sizes shown below Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions DO e When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal a Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure n Terminal Crimp b 3 7 0 15 screw terminal 6 8mm 0 27 CE y 4 or less oo one 3 7 0 15 Son 6 8mm 0 27 Se Terminal oS or less ne e When 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal Crimp E screw termina or less E 6 0mm 0 24 Ctr or more b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal or less a 6 0mm 0 24 or more ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI EOIJIN8dS Jo Bui jo sejdwexy s SsN SNOEN 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 171 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 8 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB Connect the FX 16E TB FX 32E TB to the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Input connector Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX
37. FX2N 16EX C FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LIDEYT FX2N 16EYT C 8 5 1 Internal circuit O10 to O07 Nos AAO to AA7 Nos Till semino com AAQ 442 AA4 AAG AA1 443 AA5 AAT AAQ AA2 AA4 AAG AA 1 AA5 AA FX 32E TB FX 16E TB OOO to OO7 Lower Nos 440 to 447 Higher Nos 1 24 when connected to FX2N 16EX C 2 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C 3 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C COM1 COM2 or COM3 in accordance with the connector when connected to output connector 172 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 8 5 2 Example of input external wiring sink wiring UNO WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product N lobe 1 When connected to the FX3Gc 32MT D and FX2Nc LJLJIEX input connector SUOISUBWUIG O00 to OO7 Lower Nos AAO to AA7 Higher Nos gueuey GO wm PLC s COM 3 input No 441 oo3 0o05 o07 Aal A43 AAS AAT S O Vacant O00 002 004 oo6 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG terminal feafenlex erleslea er eaten aleafea 4 To COM COM ge S o lt 5 BS Fuse 24V DC ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS 2 When connected to an FX2N 16EX C input connector indino O00 to LILI7 Lower Nos A A0 to A A7 Higher Nos D iq Input numbers in the FX2N 16EX C 001 003 005 007 AA
38. FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL E FX2N FX3U special function blocks FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3U 4LC FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL FX3U 128ASL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA FX2N 4AD FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 8AD FX2N 2LC FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M 24 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 4 List of Products No Cable or connection connector No Cable or connection connector Special adapter connector Battery connector Peripheral device connector USB 6 USB Mini B connector USB2 0 Extension connector FX2NC FX3UC 2 Peripheral device connector RS 422 7 Extension connector FX2N FX3U e MINI DIN 8Pin 3 2D D FX3U 232ADP MB D SUB 9Pin RS 232C Extension cable 1 When using an extension cable FXON 30EC or FXON 65EC use only one extension cable per gueuey GO system Make sure to use the FX2N CNV BC when the extension cable is used to connect an D extension block This extension cable is not available when the FX3U 4LC or FX2N 8AD is located at 8 the head position S Refer to Section 3 4 S 1 4 1 Main units 4 OSs 8 3 Number of Current i a Model name D ae eee input Capacity Type Type type output 5V DC points mA FX3GC 32MT D oo Mey ica pia Connector 24 V DC 400 O l sink FX3GC 32MT DSS inate Transistor Connector 24 V DC 400 Sink Source
39. JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST YA 1 JST a Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 89 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector e When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal Crimp or less ST screw terminal 6 3mm 0 25 or more 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 b Tn or less 6 3mm 0 25 or more lt Reference gt Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST FV1 25 B3A UL Listed In case of M3 5 terminal screw e When one wire is connected to one terminal Terminal Crimp 3 7 0 15 Screw VA 6 8mm 0 27 Ce or less 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Se Terminal or less When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal Crimp aries or IF screw terminal 6 0mm 0 24 so more b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 IF Terminal or less a Omm 0 24 gt Hi more Pressure Bonding Tool YA 1 JST 90 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 8 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP 3 8 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP UNO The grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP is a M2 5 screw 1 Applicable cables NO Electric wire size 0 5 to 1 5 mm AWG 20 to 16 lobe 3
40. Lower Nos AA 0 to AA7 Higher Nos gueuey GO SUOI EOIJIN9dS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW AAQ 442 AAG AAG AA1 443 AA5 AA SUOI eOIIOedS FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL SUOI EOIJIN8dS ndno JO Bulli jo sejdwexg sesp SNOEN OO 0 to OO 7 Lower Nos AA0 to AA7 Higher Nos 1 Regard it as follows in accordance with the connected connector Input connector COM1 COM2 Output connector VO0 V1 V2 9 g 5 Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 175 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL 8 6 2 Example of input external wiring Sink Source wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 Connection to the input connector in the FX3Gc 32MT DSS or FX2Nc OOEX DS for sink wiring O00 to OO7 Lower Nos A A0 toA A7 Higher Nos PLC s COMO pe ENN 001 003 005 007 AA1 443 AA5 AA7 Vacant oo0 0o02 O04 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG reams Hroma Fe 0 COM COM COM COM li Fuse Y 24V DC Three wire sensor NPN 2 Connection to the input connector in the FX3Gc 32MT DSS or FX2Nc LIDEX DS for source wiring OCO to OO7 Lower Nos A A0 toA A7 Higher Nos Roe ET t A PLC s COMO input No 001 003 005 007 AA1 AA3 AAS AA Vacant terminal
41. PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting PC side I F Serial Setting ol RS 232C L Connection Channel List No Specification include FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel USB S17 UORONJSU o seoinaq jeloeds C RS 232C Ql include Fx USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel PLC Direct Coupled Setting USB Connecti Est EE m Setup Time Out Sec 5 COM Port com 1 v PLC Type 5 B Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps On QQ D O CCIE Cont CCIE Fie n2 NET 10 H System Image 5 D Sone Select USB D CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H ne Cancel Accessing Host Station ESEN uonepodsue Kayeq 10 suoynesaig TI 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT G 5 Select FXCPU PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT s e s Jequiew nq ul saveyeq jo Buljpuey f PLC Module cc IE Field Ethernet Adapter m Setup l Cancel PLO Mode FaCPU EAEN via GOT F900 transparent mode Select FXCPU 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting 229 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series Appendix A 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900
42. R and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not a used in the program are retained z However the results of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh D input even while the PLC is in the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions S 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 7 3 Change of timer and counter settings sen The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the FE e e program c Sp o g9 n 10 3 3 Program modification function g The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below gt v Effective Ineffective je In stopped w Batch writing of file registers D and extension file registers ER seno v Partial modification of program v 9 Writing of program to PLC Modification of whole program batch writing ee v W Writing of parameters to PLC Loe v g Writing of comments to PLC OO v 1 Since the writing function is used in running statu
43. SUOI eOIIOedS Joy Bui m gt lt 3 1e D n sasn SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Auayeg _ WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION p e532 e Do not wire vacant terminals externally o p Doing so may damage the product E O EJ 145 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to s
44. User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents oe Oey oe Ws ea ce teen agen tse a ts Gach use ane een tanec ease r toaaehoea tno eaas nea ote 194 8 19 1 PSC IN CANONS nso s12528 5520 n sed ped wlnncisdoncbiet ieidin Aiserec ganado teste N Cee 194 a rag Ro 2 1k Ne 00 ene ee eee ee se et nee nee Re Men ere err are Meer cr hire E mete fern Meret eter tar 195 8 13 3 Example of output external wiring ccccccceecccceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeessueeessaeeeessaeeessaeeseeeeas 195 8 13 4 External wiring precautions isckstcccrutadreiiatart ic hutlwian tiie ecitientsat ede ach elatiin dew ibtiie dala Naini tinedsaiambtes setters 196 S 14 FA S meth ve ma U4 Dare pe are ee ae een eee ore eee eee 197 O24 1 SP SGCitl CANONS ena nc ee ee sees ade iach cae ae een tee et 197 Oo WAZ Internal C IRC UN tees oderes dian SeSetomn dene teae acs a Eae ERa araa aaraa a aa a a a 198 8 14 3 Example of output external wiring ccccccccccccceececeeeceeseeeesseeeeeeaeeeeseeeeessaeeesseeeeeseueeesaeeseeeeas 198 8 14 4 External Wiring precautions ccccccccccssececesececceeeeccsecceseceeseueeesseeeessanseeteueeensussessanssesenaeees 198 9 Battery 199 Dole Balen il Ul DOGS Sane steccassasteenceasyacassesesenenszacensaasameasasseaeeaaasemaaeeaseaaaed suena eaeseaaeaast amas eeaene sentaetens 200 92 PECICA Sethe ath ter tert ck secured at nectar ast r taunt skee 200 29 CUEING OR BANO menn teen nadie Paastmand
45. atena GIP CUE sac case aac A ate as coca peace en ln ae dnat las ad a Rs ara a 175 8 6 2 Example of input external wiring Sink Source WIFING ccccceececeeecceceeceeceeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeanes 176 8 6 3 Example of output external wiring Source WIPING ccccsecccesecceeesececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseesaeeeeeanes 177 2 TY ia Sead 6 ma er ATI eC Pe en eee een ee ere 178 O57 A SPCCINIGAUON Scie sacs ss rcis a seis ete ee a setts chest hee seer E EEA 178 O22 MEAL CrO ses etek dere a E E E 179 8 7 3 Example of input external WitlnG ji 5 sheen cv cet hiccte teeny a hew a de eset eine Ade iota ieeeee weal 179 ORO eV PR ois ares een es eit ca wk ecg ceo ven genus Gee mason 180 8 9 ll SC CING AMON S iegrtasba cetera cee ant a aA thc yeas EE 180 ro Me 2 ternak oor OL meee eee neces neon er Cnr er Po a a a 181 8 8 3 Example of output external wiring ccccccccsesccceeececeee cesses eesseeeeseaeeeesseeeesseaeesssaeeesseeeesseeseeeeees 181 O 6 4 EX ernal WITlNG DFECAULIONS 34 tecccteunre sea avert a Aenenwaes oa years 182 6 60 09 Product life f relay COMLACKS anseris en sxchdedssueanndwle a cone tease dace a a 183 SOEX OEY p ol ees gee tact aaeaetanad a a a a n 184 941 SP CCIICAHONS a eshsniadss Haven ccdia a isa so ea arse at asd Ga vat seed eed ese 184 g9 2 nterna CUE ech ater dioxin a a Bactdtestenietd A EAS a aa 185 8 9 3 Example of output external wiring cccccccccsecccceeececeeeceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeee
46. ccccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeees 78 3 4 1 Extension equipment connection configuration cccccceccccceececeeeeeceeceeceeececeeceesseeceseueeeesaeeesanes 78 3 4 2 Connecting method A Main units and Special adapter CONNECTING cccccceeeececeeeeeeaeeeenaees 78 3 4 3 Connecting method B Main units and Extension units blocks CONNECTING ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 3 4 4 Connecting method C Connection of FX2N FX3U extension blocks ccceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 3 4 5 Connecting method D Extension cable FX2N CNV BC COnnecting c sccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 3 4 6 Connecting method E Connection of FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC CNV IF to right side 000 81 3 5 Connection to peripheral device connecting Connector cccceecccceeeecaeeeeceeeesaeeeseeeeseeeeesaeeeees 82 3 6 Connection of power supply Cable cece ccccccceecceceeeeeseeeeceecesseeeeseasesseeeeseaeeeseeeesseeeseusessaeeeess 83 3 02 IROWEn Cable TY DCS au cles crys irdscaeat pe ieeaste hate seclue ach ene cease ce etaa iets ete eee teu uanttendaiehae 83 3 6 2 Connection of power cable to main unit and extension DIOCK ccceeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeens 83 3 60 39 Removal of the power cable secera e lel ceeds cbs Laoks hdel snd E aud tstiasudecsautuedt 84 3 7 Connection to Input Output CONNECHOM 0 ccc ccecccceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseecessueesseeeessaeeseneee
47. ne 0 65 62 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout 2 2 Terminal Layout O D Refer to the respective special function blocks manual 2 2 1 Main units a 1 FX3Gc 32MT D FX3GcC 32MT DSS input output connector 3 T e FX3Gc 32MT D e FX3GC 32MT DSS ge Output gueuey Q suoneaoadg SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A e represents vacant terminals 2 FX3GC 32MT D SS power connector ndu OW WM O 4 2 Power connector Q S wn o U1 Red O 2 Black 6 O 3 Ground Green ee os Qs n SEY oS 3 a ee g 9 n D 3 D w Oo Q a Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 63 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout 2 2 2 FX2NC Series input output extension block 1 Connector type FX2NC 16EX Input FX2NC 16EX DS connector Input connector Lower Higher Lower Higher numbers numbers numbers numbers Notch Notch KAES e represents vacant terminals e represents vacant terminals Power connector o LI 1 P Red 2 Black oll 1 P Red 2 Black Input FX2NC 3
48. shown to the following figure Be e External Wiring of Sink Output Type e External Wiring of Source Output Type 8 D a 3 Limit of normal Limit of normal D rotation rotation w O x pel E QO Limit of reverse PLC output Limit of reverse PLC output a rotation element rotation element Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 135 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 7 Example of external wiring 1 Transistor output Sink FX3GC 32MT D 5 to 30V DC Vacant terminal FX2nNc transistor output sink extension block FX2N transistor output sink extension block WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 136 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 2 Transistor output Source UNO FX3GC 32MT DSS NO SUOISUBWUIG lobe queue Q W O 4 Q D Vacant terminal 4 1 U 2S FX2nc transistor output z source extension block a So N lt ndu OW suoneoloadg FX2NC CNV IF FX2N transistor output source extension block Joy Bui m gt lt 3 1e D n s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not wire vac
49. source 1 4 2 I O Extension Blocks ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino 1 FX2NC Series I O Extension Blocks DL iq Q B ee ee __ Number SV DC current 8 Connecting of input Si Model name consumption S Type Type type output mA D points FX2NC 16EX AVDE Connector 30 T Sink lt sm of lt FX2NC 16EX DS ae Connector 30 oS Sink Source aos easy FX2NC 16EX T ae Terminal block 30 o 9 Sink n FX2NC 16EX T DS oY DG Terminal block 16 30 Sink Source 8 FX2NC 16EYT Transistor aS 50 w FX2NC 16EYR T DS Terminal block 50 3 FX2NC 32EX VDC 7 VDC FX2NC 32EX DS E S nec B SENE RA es es Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 25 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 Outline 1 4 List of Products 2 FX2N Series I O Extension Blocks When connected to one of the FX2N I O extension blocks listed in the following table the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is a Number 5 V DC current Connecting of input Model name t Dui consumption Type Type ype ou pu mA points FX2N BER ie a Tima block 25 24 V DC ee FX2N 8ER ES UL Sink Source Ea Terminal block 1671 25 FX2N 8EX ES UL zvoc Terminal block 25 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL B 100 V AC e 204 Terminal block a 25 FX2N 8EYR ES UL La ooo a ag Relay Terminal block Le 30 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL oa a Terminal block 30 me ae ones ela FX2N 16EYR ES
50. 1 A 1 voint Make sure that the total load current of FX2NC 32EYT p 8 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less The total load current of resistance loads per 0 5 A 1 point common terminal should be the following value FX2N 16EYT l 4points common 0 8 A 8points common 1 6 A FX2N 8EYT H 1 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 2 A or less 7 2 W 1 point Y000 Y001 Yo00 voor 24 V DC Make sure that the total load of 16 inductive load 2 4 W 1 point points is 38 4 W 24 V DC or less Y002 to Y017 24 V DC FX2NC 16EYT FX2NC 32EYT 2 4 W 1 point 24 V DC FX2N 16EYT C 7 2 W 1 point 24 V DC FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT 12 W 1 point 24 V DC FX2N 8EYT H 24 W 1 point Open circuit leakage current ON voltage 24 V DC 0 1 mA or less 30 V DC 1 5 V or less 1 When the two COM1 terminals are connected outside the PLC resistance load is 1 6 A or less 130 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output Item Transistor output sink specifications Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC Y002 to Y017 0 2 ms or less 100 mA 24 V DC OFF ON Extension Response AIST UNO For FX2NC Series 0 2 ms or less 100 mA For FX2N Series 0 2 ms or less 200 mA N time Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC 5 Os Y002 to Y017 0 2 ms or less 100 mA 24 V DC o
51. 128ASL M Unit mm inches MASS Weight 2 4 5 mounting holes Noge mame kg Ibs Approx 0 2 FX3U 128ASL M 0 44lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws e Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 87 3 43 95 5 3 76 e The extension cable is already connected to 43 1 7 the extension block 59 O D SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 ou ousg Q suoneolyoads SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 1 5 Special adapters 1 Analog special adapters Unit mm inches 15 1 0000000000 HLL 7 0 28 2 92 0 62 2 Communication special adapters FX3U 232ADP MB Unit mm inches FX3U 485ADP MB 2 04 5 mounting holes 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 17 6 0 70 Z O iyan Q mo L 2 vo D g O N 17 6 0 70 Unit mm inches 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch MASS Weight Model name kg Ibs FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4D
52. 184 points 232 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers B Performance Specifications User s Manual Hardware Edition gt Item Performance oes ween C200 to C219 20 points Counter For general Counting from 2 147 483 648 to pada ated C220 to C234 15 points eel al EEPROM keep p 1 phase 1 count input in both directions UOISJO 2 3 D r OU 32 bits up down Ceao 0 CARS ie EEPROM keep D 5 1 phase 2 count input in Ss 2 High speed both directions l a C246 to C250 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 counter 32 bits up down EEPROM keep 2 phase 2 count input in both directions 32 bits up down EEPROM keep For general 16 bits DO to D127 128 points For EEPROM keep 16 bits D128 to D1099 972 points 2 C251 to C255 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds O For general D1100 to D7999 6900 points Data register 16 bits 32 bits when File reaister Maximum 7000 Cam be set as file registers in units of paired EEREN keen D1000 to D7999 ae 500 points from D1000 in the program p P area EEPROM using parameters For special 16 bits D8000 to D851 1 512 points E For index VO to V7 3 A or in l QB 16 bits ZO to Z7 TO pomis aS 2 z on For general RO to R23999 24000 points 2 register 16 bits Extension file For EEPROM keep ERO to ER23999 24000 points Stored in the EEPROM built in the main register 16 bits unit
53. 4 2 icom L4 Lej con com o 0 6 Loo A SE OO 0 to OO 7 Lower numbers AA 0 to AA 7 Higher numbers 141 V1 or V2 in accordance with connected connector 8 9 3 Example of output external wiring The example of output external wiring is the same as FX 16EYR TB Refer to Subsection 8 8 3 8 9 4 External wiring precautions The caution on external wiring is the same as FX 16EYR TB Refer to Subsection 8 8 4 8 9 5 Product life of relay contacts Product life of relay contacts is the same as FX 16EYR TB Refer to Subsection 8 8 5 185 UNnO N SUOISUBWUIG jeu13 x3 gueuey GO SUOI EOIJIN8dS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS nding OD SUOI EOIJIN8dS JO Bui jo sejdwexg s SsN SNOEN 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 10 FX 16EYT TB 8 10 FX 16EYT TB Connect the FX 16EYT TB to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LIDIEYT FX2N 16EYT C The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pul
54. 4 ch Voltage current input 70 1 ch Voltage current output 4 FX2N 8AD 8 ch Voltage current temperature thermocouple input S 50 OU O O FX2N 2LC 2 loop Temperature control 70 Bg resistance thermometer sensor thermocouple 92 S5 N lt 2 Data link and communication functions When connected to the special function blocks in the following table the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required Model name Description Number of 5 V DC current input output consumption points mA ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS Master for CC Link Compatible With CC Link Ver 2 00 and Ver 1 10 FX3U 16CCL M Connectable stations Remote I O station Remote device station 1 Intelligent device station 6 Intelligent device station for CC Link Epson earn 1 to 4 stations occupied pe i a 2 xe FX2N 16CCL M Master for CC Link Compatible With CC Link Ver 1 10 4 i z Connectable stations Remote I O station Remote device station Remote device station for CC Link n PAANAN 1 to 4 stations occupied e FX2N 64CL M Master for CC Link LT 190 7 FX3U 128ASL M Master for AnyWireASLINK 130 sem 23 35 0 l a l l 223 1 The number of input output occupied points is obtained using the following formula TeS i Cx Number of input output occupied points Number of remote I O stations x 32 points 8 points Bo n 2 The number of input output occupied points is obtained using the following formula Number of input output occupied points To
55. 6 SYstent Ov rall Configura to sssccts cscs octusbanaebaasbeeme e eancia A A ene ainda Doeomsemeeretie 33 it Rules Or SY Stent COMNGULAUON enaku EE E EA 34 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points cccccceececeeeeeseeceeaeeeeseeeetaneeesees 35 1 8 1 Calculation of number of input output points cece cc eccceceeceeseeeeceee cesses eeeseeceeseeeeseeeeeseeeeees 35 1 8 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 1 8 3 Maximum number of input output points when AnyWireASLINK master is USEd cccceeeees 38 1 9 Calculation of 5 V DC power supply capacity Current CONSUMPTION ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 39 1 10 Restriction in number of units IN each QrOUP cccccseececceeececceeececceeseecseeeeesseeeesseeeeesseseeesseass 40 1 11 Number of occupied I O points and 5 V DC current CONSUMPTION c cece ceececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 42 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeesaees 44 1 12 1 Re examination of suitability for configuration ccccccceeeeeeeceaeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeaeeeesaaeaees 46 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration ccccccccecseeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeesaees 48 1 13 1 Judgment of availability after reexamination of CONFIQUIATION ccceececeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeee
56. 6306 Communication time out detected applications na 6307 Soden initialization error e N N network parallel link MODBUS communication etc 8 e Continues Check programs according to applications i oO 6308 operation N N network parameter error s Remote maintenance T 6309 N N network setting error Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the ae 6312 Parallel link character error AT commands i e Wiring 6313 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring 5 6314 Parallel link format error DS xe 6321 MODBUS communication error D O 6340 Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter D Parameter error M8064 D8064 o0 Neeror 6 6401 Program sum check error DO oS 6402 Memory capacity setting error S g QO 6403 Latched device area setting error 6404 Comment area setting error a 6405 File register area setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters 6406 Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction T setting sum check error 5 y 6407 Stops Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction caz setting error op operation Cro 6409 Other setting error 2 Q e STOP the PLC and correctly set the special parameters 6420 Special parameter sum check error e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and 8 then turn ON the power e Check the contents of the special parameter error code D D8489 confi
57. 7 7 N amp gt Or Positioning mark 2 USB At connection confirm the cable and connector shape Peripheral device connector 82 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 6 Connection of power supply cable 3 6 Connection of power supply cable UNO 3 6 1 Power Cable types N Power Cable types A and B are supplied with the main unit while type C is supplied with the FX2Nc OLEX FX2Nc 16EX T and FX2NC FX3uc Series special function blocks om 30 Type Application Model Length Cable supplied with 25 beng Za n UN FX2NC 1m A Power cable for main unit 100MPCB 3 3 FX3GC 32MT D FX3GC 32MT DSS Input power cable for FX2NC Series input extension FX2NC fe B blocks and FX2NC FX3UC Series special function 100BPCB 3 3 FX3GC 32MT D blocks MG os DG ror_lextension blocks and FXANCIFXAUC Series special PNG Oc m_ FX2NC CIDEX FX2NC 16EX T p 10BPCB1 0 3 FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks Qo function blocks ep The crossover cable type C can skip up to 4 16 point output blocks to connect units If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input block use cable type B 4 n n n MU 3 6 2 Connection of power cable to main unit and extension block gg The PLC receives and supplies power through the built in dedicated power connector oS
58. 8 7 FX 16EX A1 TB 8 7 2 Internal circuit UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe OOo tod03 O04 to0O0O 7 AAOtoAA3 AA4tOAA7 gueuey GO SUOI EOIJIN9dS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW OO 0 to OO 7 Lower numbers AA 0 to AA7 Higher numbers SUOI eOIIOedS 1 24 when connected to FX2N 16EX C 2 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C indino op 8 7 3 Example of input external wiring 8 aj 5 PLC input OO0toWU3 O04 to007 AAOtoAA3 AA4tOAAT 7 SaN tO TE Fp P 9 Photo cou plerp power supply amo eean eao 100 to i 120V AC 24V DC Il IN Fuse Fuse 9 g 5 dea oD Dn ES c FE a J 5 Q O gt Q 179 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 8 FX 16EYR TB 8 8 FX 16EYR TB Connect the FX 16EYR TB to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LIDIEYT FX2N 16EYT C The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction varia
59. 8405 2 D 8406 2 D 8407 2 D 8408 2 D 8409 2 D 84102 D 8411 2 D 8412 to D 8414 2 D 8415 D 8416 2 D 8417 2 D 8063 2 D 8419 2 IP Address Low order IP Address High order Subnet mask Low order Subnet mask High order Default router IP Address Low order Default router IP Address High order Status information Connection condition of the Ethernet port FX3U ENET ADP version Communication timeout time Connection forcible nullification Time setting functional operation result Host MAC address Not used Model code Error code of the Ethernet adapter Error code Operation mode 2 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later Correspond ing special device M8422 M8423 246 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 A f 2 5 lt Number and Sor eapond Number and s Correspond Ss Content of register ing special Content of register ing special o name name 3S device device FX3U ENET ADP ch2 Error Detection 5 D 8420 IP Address Low order D 8468 to D 8488 D 8421 IP Address High order E D 8489 3 emor code for special parameter B 4 T WU T e D18490 to OST a8 D 8423 Subnet mask High order 3 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later a p18424 1 Default router IP Address i FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 S p D Low order
60. 87 ch0 D 8383 Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8384 Receive sum received data l RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8385 Receive sum calculated result RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8386 Receive sum calculated result D 8387 i D388 Not used D 8389 Operation mode display ch0 Number and name Ring Counter D 8398 D 8399 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D 8400 D 8401 D 8402 D 8403 D 8404 D 8405 D 8406 D 8407 D 8408 D 8409 D 8410 D 8411 D 8412 D 8413 D 8414 D 8415 D 8416 D 8417 D 8418 D 8419 aie 2 Corres ponding special device Content of register Up operation ring counter of 0 to 2 147 483 647 in units of 1ms 32 bit 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Communication format setting M8398 Not used 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Remaining points of transmit data 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Monitoring receive data points M8402 M8403 Not used Communication parameter display ch1 Not used RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Receive sum calculated result RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send sum Not used s e s JOQUIOLU ng ul seveyeq Operation mode display ch1
61. 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 195 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 13 FX 16EYS TB 8 13 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits Micro current load In phase A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Terminal block The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off Micro current load C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of 0 4 VA 100 V AC or less or 1 6 VA 200 V AC or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load 7 Surge Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the PLC output absorber load being used Refer to the table below for other specifications Semen Item Guide Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1 uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to th
62. D 8351 Default 0 D 8204 Number of communication error at D 8352 Y001 Bias speed Default 0 a D 8353 Y001 Maximum speed l D 8205 as ee ion error a D 8354 Default 100000 D 8206 Number of communication error at D 8355 ee speed slave station No 3 M8183 to i nati D 8356 Y001 Zero return speed D 8207 Number of communication error at M8191 i p slave station No 4 D 8357 Default 50000 Number of communication error at Y001 Acceleration time D 8358 D18208 slave station No 5 Default 100 Number of communication error at Y001 Deceleration time D 8359 3 019203 slave station No 6 Default 100 D 8210 Number of communication error at D 8360 to D 8369 slave station No 7 244 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D851 1 Corres numbenand Content of register ponding name special device RS2 FNC 87 ch0 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8370 Communication format setting i 018371 P RS2 FNC 87 ch0 1 D 8372 Remaining points of transmit data ie 3 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 1 D 8373 Monitoring receive data points ae D 8374 D 8375 D 8376 Not used D 8377 D 8378 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8379 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8380 Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt i RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8381 Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8382 Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt l RS2 FNC
63. Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Generic immunity standard e RF immunity Industrial environment Fast Transients e ESD e Conducted e Power magnetic fields EN61131 2 1994 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard A11 1996 Equipment requirements and tests e Radiated electromagnetic field A12 2000 e Fast transient burst e Electrostatic discharge e Damped oscillatory wave EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirements and tests EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst e Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF e Power frequency magnetic field 11 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Standards Users Manual Hardware Edition Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 2006 95 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FXa2nNc series manufactured from August 1st 1999 FX2NC 16EYR T DS from October 1st 2007 FX2NC 16EYR T Standard
64. External Dimensions amp Component Names 8 2 External Dimensions amp Component Names FX 16E TB FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB FX 32E TB UL 150 5 91 150 5 91 45 1 2 5 787 A e ioa ram a eta Galea 1 Haua AL Ti L Z FX 32E TB Z mM Ramarao eels LL pesTes es ese o U A FX 16E TB 8 55 2 17 6 9 7 9 FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYR ES TB UL FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT ES TB UL FX 16EYT ESS TB UL FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYS ES TB UL 150 5 91 150 5 91 1 3 FX 16EX A1 TB AN 1 FX 16EYR TB 55 2 17 9 9 6 9 6 Units mm inches Accessories Input output No labels terminal block arrangement cards 1 CN1 connector 2 CN2 connector Present at FX 32E TB FX 32E TB UL Present at FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYR ES TB UL 3 Operation indicator LED FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT ES TB UL FX 16EYT ESS TB UL FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYS ES TB UL 4 POWER LED Present at FX 16EX A1 TB 5 CN2 terminal block M3 5 screws Present at FX 32E TB FX 32E TB UL 6 CN1 terminal block M3 5 screws 7 Nameplate 8 DIN rail mounting groove DIN rail width 35 mm 1 38 9 DIN rail mounting hook sesp SNOEN 167 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey GO SUOI EOIINedS A ddng Jamo
65. FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D851 1 Number and Correspond Content of register ing special name device Output Refresh Error D 8109 Y number where output refresh M8109 error occurs ISTO w OI 3 RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 RS FNC 80 instruction and D 8120 computer link ch1 Communication format setting D 8121 Computer link ch1 i 8 Station number setting i RS FNC 80 instruction 2 0 6122 Remaining points of transmit data Nae RS FNC 80 instruction 2 D 8123 Monitoring receive data points NSA RS FNC 80 instruction or Header lt Default STX gt j RS FNC 80 instruction es Terminator lt Default ETX gt i pisas Computer link ch1 D 8127 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch1 D 8128 Specification of on demand data matao TO M8129 length register RS FNC 80 instruction computer D 8129 link ch1 Time out time setting sa Latch device 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Positioning D18130 to D18135 PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC D 8136 Lower 59 instructions 7 Accumulated total number of D 8137 Upper pulses output to YOOO and _ Y001 D 8138 Not used D 8139 Accumulated number of D 8140 Lower pulses output to Y000 for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR D 8141 FNC 59 instructions p Accumulated number of D 81
66. For branching of JUMP and PO to P2047 2048 points For CJ instructions and CALL CALL instructions Tomter Input interruption lOLILI to ISOL 6 points Timer interruption ISHLI to IBU 3 points Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instructions 16bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal number K 32bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 16bits O to FFFF Constant Hexadecimal number H 32bits 0 to FFFFFFFF 128 126 126 128 Decimal point and exponential notations are possible 1 The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built in the PLC Supply the power to the PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large capacity capacitor The capacitor works for 10 days atmosphere 25 C The current time can be backed up by the battery when the optional battery is incorporated For details on the battery refer to Chapter 9 uonewodsue Ksyeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s J qw u na ul s n yeq jo Buljpuey 2 These devices can be changed to the keep battery backup type using a parameter when the optional battery is used For the parameter setting method refer to Chapter 9 3 The standard mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16000 steps or less using a parameter The extension mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16001 steps or more using a parameter For parameter settings refer to the Programming Manual 233 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Us
67. Input sensitivity 3 5 mA or more current FX2NC DIDEX T OFF 1 5 mA or less Input signal current indu SUOI eOIIOedS indino Input response time Approx 10 ms D Input signal form No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor 8 QO Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation E input epsratien Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp display SaN FE acd Input circuit oS configuration g s z 1 Input impedance D v O Q Q Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 101 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 2 Sink Source input 24 V DC Input Specifications Sink Source input Item FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LILIEX T DS FX2N Input extension blocks Nurmberorinput FX3GC 32MT DSS 16 points FX2N 8ER ES UL 4 points Pints P FX2NC 16EX T DS 16 points FX2N 8EX ES UL 8 points p FX2NC 32EX DS 32 points FX2N 16EX ES UL 16 points Input connecting Except for the FX2NC 16EX T DS Connector Tomoi type FX2NC 16EX T D Terminal block Input form Sink Source input Input signal voltage 24 V DC 20 15 FX2NC LIDEX T DS FX2NC LIDEX T DS 5 mA 24 V DC current FX2NC LIDIEX T DS OFF 1 5 mA or less Input response time Approx 10 ms Input impedance Input signal current Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open col
68. Judgment of availability after reexamination of configuration In this configuration it is necessary to add an extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V due to the restrictions in the 5 V DC power supply capacity Construct the system as follows 1 Example of reexamined system configuration Connect the extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V in place of the FX2NC CNV IF F X3U FX3GC JFX2Nc FX2Nc FX2Nc FX2NC FX3uUC FX2n FX3U 4AD ADP 32MT D Fi6EX 16EYT 16EYR T 16EYR T 1PS 5V 64CL M 16CCL M Terminating Terminating CC Link LT resistor resistor Terminating CL1Y4 T1B2 CL1X4 D1B2 resistor 4 points output units 4 points input units Station No 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Station No 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Terminating AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTB1 16T resistor 16 points input units 16 points output units Remote I O station Remote I O station 2 Reexamination of system configuration availability 1 Restriction for the number of input output points There is no problem since the number of input output points in the new system is 120 OK 2 Restriction for the number of remote I O points There is no problem since the number of remote I O points in the new system is 64 OK 3 Restriction for the 5 V DC power supply capacity The 5 V DC power supply capacity is as follows after countermeasures Main unit side 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side 400m
69. M 8207 7 M 8253 C253 ON Up count operation M 8208 M 8254 C254 M 8209 M 8255 C255 vazo meom Nouse o M 8211 C211 Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix C 3 for details M 8212 C212 x M 8280 to M 8289 1st special adapter oori Cele j M 8290 to M 8299 2nd special adapter z M 8214 C214 z 0214 1 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the ices C215 When M8CICILis ON the main unit side M 8216 corresponding CLILIL is j FI M 8217 changed to down mode ag TE OFF Up count operation i M 8304 ON when the multiplication and Zero division calculated result is 0 M 8220 22 a 8905 3 M 8221 C221 221 M 8306 ON when the division calculated result i M 8222 C222 Carry overflows IZ O METOM aai Sec M 8312 2 Real time clock data lost error ze ____TMBSTS to IM8S2B Not used ooo M0226 M 8329 Instruction execution abnormal end M 8227 2 Backed up against power interruption and automatically M 8228 i cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data M 8229 is set again M 8230 j M 8231 7 M 8232 3 M 8233 M 8234 234 High Speed Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8235 C235 M 8236 C236 M 8237 C237 M 8238 C238 eee When M8LILILI is ON the M 8239 C239 corresponding COOL is M 8240 changed to down mode M 8241 e ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 238 C Operation
70. M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit This master cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M 35 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoleoljioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points 4 Calculate the total number of input output points Total the number of points counted in Steps 1 2 and 3 and check that it does not exceed 128 points maximum number of input output points Maximum number of Number of input output points Number of input output occupied input output points points 128 points Maximum number of D units x 8 points gt j C 9 Each special function block used for FROM TO instructions Total number of input output points of points controllable on Main units input output extension blocks l bana system and CC Linkil T occupies eight input or output points Number of input output points of main unit D Number of special function blocks A B Number of input output points of input output extension blocks C Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M When CC Link or AnyWireASLINK master is used count the remote I O points When a CC Link or
71. Manufacturer Model names Phoenix Contact Co Ltd SZS 0 4 x 2 5 88 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector 3 7 3 Input Output Terminal Blocks FX2N FX3u Extension blocks UNO WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual NO lobe 3 iq 5 ui O 5 n suolyeoljioeds 9aUas Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the p
72. O00 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG Hrarelea irea iea He COM COM COM COM Three wire sensor PNP 1 COM1 or COM2 in accordance with connected connector 176 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL 8 6 3 Example of output external wiring Source wiring UNnO WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION N Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 5 1 When connected to the FX3Gc 32MT DSS and FX2Nc LILIEYT DSS output connector A O00 to OO7 Lower Nos AAO toA A7 Higher Nos gueuey Q PLC s V0 g epi 001 o03 005 007 AA1 443 AA5 AA7 3 Vacant aj terminal 220 2002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG T eee kA 4 Le Ee COMI BS 8 5 8 2 eos N lt ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS 41 V1 or V2 in accordance with connected connector indino SUOI EOIJIN8dS Jo Bui jo sejdwexy s SsN SNOEN 9 g 5 Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 177 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 7 FX 16EX A1 TB 8 7 FX 16EX A1 TB 8 7 1 Connect the FX 16EX A1 TB to the input connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Connectable models Input connector FX3GC 32MT D FK2N
73. PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit connector conversion adapter and Battery 3 WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING none e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock GEE S2fcty Precautions uD Read these precautions before use CAUTION a Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q
74. PLCs are shown in the following table Item Specifications 100 to 110 VAC 10 15 50 60 Hz 6 2 mA 110 V 60 Hz 4 7 mA 100 V 50 Hz 3 8 mA 80 V AC O N OFF 1 7 mA 30 V AC Input signal voltage Input signal current Input sensitivity 100 to 120V AC Photocoupler 112 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 AC input FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 5 4 3 Example of external wiring UNnO Do not bind or lay wires near the AC input wiring and DC input wiring Assure a distance of 100 mm 3 93 or more between the wires Without wire separation wires are easily affected by noise and power surges N FX3GC 32MT D DC DC converter RE roay nnn Handle the power supply circuit correctly in l accordance with Chapter 4 Power supply l specifications and l external wiring Power connector jeu19 x3 SUOISUBWUIG guaueg Gd suoneoyioads wire sensor FX2Nc extension block 4 Dedicated to sink ou input types onl oe eee y For an input device having a 2 S 82 S5 N lt je 2 parallel resistance or a ICOM E two wire proximity switch a aa x000 i bleeder resistance may be 2 required Photocoupler X001 n Refer to Subsection 5 2 4 X003 Du Os ff 3 Input t S terminal Two wir proximity D FX2NC CNV IF C sensor Fuse BO MC o 8 Iv NJ
75. Power should be supplied to the main unit FX2NC Series input extension blocks and FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks Perform crossover wiring using two upper and lower power connectors for FX2NC LILIEX FX2NC 16EX T and FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks The FX2Nc LILIEX DS and FX2Nc 16EX T DS do not have a power connector and receive power from the input connector ndu OW SUOI EOIIOedS Main unit Input extension block Output extension block Input extension block indino WD xe The figure below shows the pin numbers of the power connectors 8 Main unit Extension block FX3uc 1PS 5V 3 1 Red 1 Red 2 Black j 2 oe i j Black 3 Ground Green 1 3 Ground Green r Sgp 235 Resin cover c 28 At shipment from the factory a resin cover is attached to the lower oo connector Connect the upper connector first 8 Remove the resin cover from the lower connector when performing crossover wiring for the later block D Crossover wiring between the D input extension block S e Wiring from the FX2NC LILIEX FX2Nc 16EX T or FX2NC FX3UC Series special function block to another block Two power connectors of the FX2NC LILIEX FX2NcC 16EX T and FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks are connected in parallel inside the block and there is no distinction between the power inlet side and the power outlet side Either connector can be used for wiring At shipment from the factory a resin cover
76. R For details refer to FX3U 128ASL M S movement from the current position ae User s Manual Positioning absolute positioning to specify DRVA the target position based on the current 4 Analog functions value 0 3 siey instruction to change the pulse train output The special adapter and special function block po frequency for each analog function are connected 22 Instruction for positioning based on batch Refer to Analog Control Edition 9 a TBL setting of positioning operation moving i S distance and speed Types of analog functions e Voltage current input 4 re e Voltage current output 3 Communication and network functions j i Bs i e j Q The special adapter or special function block for Temperature sensor input thermocouple and aie each communication function can be connected platinum resistance thermometer sensor 5S N e Temperature control Kinds of communication functions e Programming communication RS 232C RS 422 USB e N N Network e Parallel link ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS e Computer link e Inverter communication e Non protocol communication Built in RS 422 RS 232C RS 485 Refer to the Data Communication Edition e MODBUS communication Refer to MODBUS Serial Communication Edition e Ethernet Supported in Ver 2 00 or later Refer to FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual e CC Link Master station Compatible with CC Link Ver 2 00 and Ver 1 10 FX3U 16CCL M Intelligent de
77. Series When monitoring circuits device monitor etc in an FX3GC PLC from GX Works2 using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 3 Select RS 232C in setting shown below and set COM port and Transmission Speed Transfer Setup Connection1 CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet CC IE Field Q Series NET II PLC NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board Board Board com COM1 Transm Double click it PLC side I F i PLC E Cont CC Link Ethernet 24 GOT CC IE Field CC IE Field Module NEW OCH Module Module Master Local Communication Module Head Module afe PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting Bl RS 232C Connection Channel List No Specification i LISB LISB a Cancel PLC Direct Coupled Setting C USB Setup Connection Test Time Out Sec 5 COM Port comi xl Oo meme PLC Type Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps v E CC IE Cont CC IE Fie NET 10 H aia System Image b TEL FXCPU OK CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link NET 10 H Cancel Accessing Host Station ong 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Set
78. UL so ee i Terminal block 40 FX2N 16EYT e a eo Transistor sink Terminal block 180 FX2N 16EYT ESS UL pe ff e ene Terminal block 180 1 Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers 1 4 3 Special function blocks For details on each product refer to the appropriate product manual 1 Analog control a FX2NC FX3UC Series D Number of 5 V DC current Model name Description input output consumption points mA FX3UC 4AD 4 ch Voltage current input PB 100 FX2NC 4AD 4 ch Voltage current input FB 50 FX2NC 4DA 4 ch Voltage current output FB 30 26 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 4 List of Products b FX2N FX3U Series When connected to the special function blocks of the following table the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required Model name Description Number of 5 V DC current input output consumption points mA 2 FX3U 4AD 4 ch Voltage current input PB 110 BE FX3U 4DA 4 ch Voltage current output PB 120 E g w FX3U 4LC 4 loop Temperature control 160 S resistance thermometer sensor thermocouple micro voltage input D FX2N 2AD 2 ch Voltage current input e 20 FX2N 2DA 2 ch Voltage current output PB 30 3 FX2N 4AD 4 ch Voltage current input PB 30 WM G FX2N 4AD PT 4 ch Temperature resistance thermometer sensor input FB 30 8 2 D FX2N 4AD TC 4 ch Temperature thermocouple input FB 30 aj a FX2N 4DA 4 ch Voltage current output PB 30 gt FX2N 5A
79. X terminal and the COM terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED indino g lights 8 3 l sat e Common to both sink and source input types 6 For sink input in the sink source common input type connect the 24 V DC terminal and COML terminal 2 235 and electrically connect an input terminal and 24 V DC with a no voltage contact or NPN open collector 9 transistor to turn ON the input For source input connect the 24 V DC terminal and COMU terminal 2 and electrically connect an input terminal and 24 V DC with a no voltage contact or PNP open collector 8 transistor to turn ON the input Sink input wiring Source input wiring z S Aayeg _ 1 Input impedance 2 S S terminal in FX2N Series extension blocks Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 103 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 2 Input circuit Function of input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is provided with a C R filter The C R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from the input line There is a delay of approx 10 ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Change of filter time X000 to X007 have digital fil
80. Z v Extension power supply unit Only one extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V can be used for the whole system S FX3UC 1PS 5V x Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 41 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 11 Number of occupied I O points and 5 V DC current consumption 1 11 Number of occupied I O points and 5 V DC current consumption The table below shows the number of input output occupied points for each model and the current consumed from the 5 V DC main unit built in power supply or the 5 V DC FX3UCc 1PS 5V power supply unit 1 Main units A Number of input output 5 V DC current Model name i points consumption mA 2 Special adapters ee Number of input output 5 V DC current Division Model name i points consumption mA FX3U 4AD ADP 15 FX3U 4DA ADP 15 FX3U 3A ADP 20 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 15 E FRUMADTCADP OY Paza OT Passo OT FRUENETADP OTC 3 I O extension devices C eae Number of input output 5 V DC current Division Model name i f points consumption mA FX2NC 16EYT 50 FX2NC 16EYT DSS 50 FX2NC 16EYR T 50 FX2NC 16EYR T DS 50 FX2NC 32EX 60 FX2NC 32EX DS 60 FX2NC 32EYT 100 FX2NC 32EYT DSS 100 FX2N 8ER FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX pas o oo e TC oo o o oo oo oo o FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYR 42 FX3GC Series Pro
81. atl eta al eta eta C4 TLS oom Lo 24 o J C2 J oom cono T 2 Tona 141 V1 or V2 in accordance with connected connector 8 14 3 Example of output external wiring Surge absorbers are connected to each output PLC output n00 1 2 3 04567 0123 444567 No Photo coupler power supply 8 14 4 External wiring precautions The caution on external wiring is the same as FX 16EYS TB Refer to Subsection 8 13 4 198 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Battery Users Manual Hardware Edition UNO 9 Battery STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE A A RN N G PRECAUTIONS e Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual Use the battery only for the specified purpose Connect the battery correctly Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight NO SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q Do not expose to water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly a Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment D STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE 4 PRECAUTION
82. be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 3 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind If the product is used in such conditions electric shock fire malfunctions deterioration or damage may occur Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Main unit FX2NC Serie
83. cable is already connected to the extension block MASS Weight Model name kg Ibs Approx 0 4 FX2N 16CCL M 0 88Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Label for indication of special unit block number Terminal resistor 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated cable 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated high performance cable Manual supplied with product e Accessories e Terminal block M3 screw for power supply terminal M3 5 screw for signal terminal e The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 58 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M z i Unit mm inches iaht 2 4 5 mounting holes ane anaes MASS Weight kg Ibs Approx 0 2 FX2N 32CCL 0 44Ibs Approx 0 15 FX2N 64CL M FX2N 32CCL 0 33lbs C POWER Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws LRUN LERR RD SO SII 0000 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with r 4 0 16 product 43 1 7 87 3 43 e The terminal block of FX2N 32CCL is the M3 screw The CC Link LT interface connector of FX2N 64CL M is in the front panel of the product The extension cable is already connected to the extension block FX3U
84. e When the output does not operate 3 Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension 4 cables are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged ee Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Bs 3 wp 2 Output does not turn off oS Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring e When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS e When the output does not turn off The output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 10 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks indino 7 O iq For inputs and outputs of special function blocks refer to each manual O 1 Input does not turn on D In the FX3Gc 32MT D remove the external wiring short circuit the COM terminal and an input terminal and then check using the LED or programming tool whether the input turns ON F In the FX3GC 32MT DSS remove the external wiring and apply 24 V DC between the COMA terminal and Sem an input terminal in reference to Section 5 2 Check using the LED or programming tool whether the input 33 turns ON 23a After confirmation take the countermeasures shown in t
85. ends Donot connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 128 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 1 Sink and Source Output Transistor Transistor outputs in the main unit and FX2N FX2NC Series I O extension blocks are classified into sink output type or source output type 1 Differences in circuit e Sink output common Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is called sink output e Source output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output 129 UNO N SUOISUBUIG lobe g
86. extension block and special function block The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 2 special function blocks when the extension power supply unit is not used Up to 4 input output extension blocks and special function blocks in total can be connected after the FX2NC CNV IF is within the maximum number of connectable units There is no problem because only 2 special function blocks are connected after the FX2NC CNV IF There is no problem here because only 2 special function blocks are connected which c Other restrictions In some models only up to 4 units or 5 units in certain conditions can be connected to a single main unit When connecting 5 or more units it is necessary to add an extension power supply unit Refer to Section 1 10 This configuration includes the following equipment that fall under the restriction for the number of connectable units FX2NC 16EYR T x 2 There is no problem with this configuration since it satisfies the restriction for the number of connectable units 5 units 49 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe queue Q suoleoljioeds Suoleoljioads A ddng Jamog A ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino suoeoyineds Joy Bui jo sejdwexy sesp SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aayeg O _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration 1 13 1
87. from four points should be 0 8 A average per point is 0 2 A When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently the root mean square current should be 0 2 Aor less lt Example gt 0 4A A x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 A v DA 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 Sec Sec Sec 6 Open circuit leakage current A C R absorber is connected for turn off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC Therefore when the circuit opens a leakage current will be 1 mA at 100 V AC and 2 mA at 200 V AC Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open small size relays and micro current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the triac output is turned off Therefore use a load of 0 4 VA or more at 100 V AC or 1 6 VA or more at 200 V AC If the load is less than this value connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load For the connection of the surge absorber refer to Subsection 6 3 3 6 3 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of 0 4 VA 100 V AC or less or 1 6 VA 200 V A
88. i D 84924 IP address setting Low order 4 Default router IP Address D 8425 High order i D 84934 IP address setting High order D 8426 Status information i D 84944 Subnet mask setting Low order Ze D8427 t Connection condition of the Ethernet f D 8495 4 Subnet mask setting High order SS vg por A Default router IP address setting z 2 i D 84964 Ss D 8428 FX3U ENET ADP version Low order PP D 8429 1 Communication timeout time D 8497 Default router IP address setting i High order D D 8430 Connection forcible nullification 4 Error code for IP address storage 5 1018431 Time setting functional operation D 8498 area wheite i a o D18499 4 Error code for IP address storage i S D 8432 to D 8434 1 Host MAC address D area clear wn D 8435 4 Supported in Ver 2 10 or later D 8436 Model code E D 8437 1 Error code of the Ethernet adapter 30 oD D 8439 Operation mode z Q 1 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later Error Detection Error code for serial communication error 2 ch2 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D 8439 Error Detection D 8438 M8438 uonewodsue Kayeq 10 suonnesalg TI Operation mode display ch2 G D 8440 to D 8448 Not used D 8449 Special block error code M8449 D 8450 to D 8459 Not used Positioning D 8460 to D 8463 Not used DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC156 instructions jo Buljpuey s e s JOQ
89. input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms initial value e The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters input interrupt pulse catch SPD DSZR ZRN instructions and general purpose inputs There should be no overlap between each input number suogeayoadg Joy Bui jo sejdwexy e Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency described above If an input signal exceeds the response frequency a WDT error may occur or the communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction s sN SNOEN e The response frequency changes depending on the number of used counters but the input filter value is fixed to 10 us X000 X001 X003 X004 or 50 us X002 X005 X006 X007 Note that noise above the response frequency may be counted depending on the filter value of the used input yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 123 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 6 Input Interruption lI0OL to 1500 5 6 Input Interruption 1000 to 1500 The PLC main unit is provided with an input interruption function and has six interruption input points Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10 us or more X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50 us or more X002 and X005
90. is activated Input Filter D 8020 Input filter adjustment D 8021 D 8022 D 8023 D 8024 D 8025 D 8026 D 8027 Input filter value of X000 to X007 Default 10 ms Not used Index Register Z0 and VO D 8028 Value of ZO Z register 2 D 8029 Value of VO V register 2 Constant Scan D18030 1o 018036 Default 0 ms in 1 ms steps D 8039 Pancanesean a from system ROM at power M8039 duration Can be overwritten by program 2 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to D8195 241 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO SOULWIOJIOd W ep O O h O O gt N 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o seoinaq jeloeds m sj pow penuljuocosiq uonewodsue Aueyeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s Jaquiew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D851 1 Correspond Number and i Content of register ing special name device Stepladder and Annunciator D 8040 ON state number 1 D 8041 1 ON state number 2 D 8042 1 ON state number 3 The smallest number out of active T state ranging from SO to S899 and D 8043 S1000 to S4095 is stored in D8040 ON state number 4 and the second smallest state M8047 D 8044 1 number is stored in D8041 ON state numbers Active state numbers are
91. is attached to the lower connector Use the upper connector first Remove the resin cover from the lower connector only when performing crossover wiring for another block Aayeg _ Azo The FX2NC LILIEX DS and FX2Nc 16EX T DS do not have a power connector and receive power from SEE the input connector It is not necessary to remove the resin cover pS Dza n 83 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 6 Connection of power supply cable 3 6 3 Removal of the power cable 1 Pinch the power cable connector a and disconnect it in the direction of the arrow Press here 84 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector 3 Connection to Input Output Connector UNO 3 7 1 Input output connector Main unit FX2Nc Extension block N 1 Connection to input output connector Ol The input and output connectors of the main unit and extension blocks for FX2Nc conform to the MIL C 35 83503 Note Some of extension blocks for FX2Nc are the European terminal block type DD Procure the input output cables in reference to the table below and the next page a For the terminal arrangement refer to Section 2 2 Example Main unit ep SY OS 2 0 ae Qa
92. larger a The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 20 VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test VO OS 2 0 Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Bo Load capacity Contact life D 0 2 A 100 V AC 20 VA 3 000 000 times 0 1 A 200 V AC 4 0 35 A 100 V AC DD 35 VA 1 000 000 times oe 0 17 A 200 V AC 2 5 Q 0 8 A 100 V AC aS 80 VA 200 000 times 52 0 4 A 200 V AC The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush over current is shut down ndu QT For precautions on using inductive loads refer to Subsection 6 2 4 2 z Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make S sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance 3 load P 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circu
93. limit Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right Reverse PLC output limit element 188 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 11 FX 16EYT ES TB UL 8 11 FX 16EYT ES TB UL UNO Connect the FX 16EYT ES TB UL to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector N Connectable models FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIDEYT DSS The applications shown below are not supported jeu19 x3 Unsupported Applications SUOISUBWUIG Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction gueuey Q drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction a Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 3 n 8 11 1 Specifications 4 Item FX 16EYT ES TB UL 3 3 E Te
94. more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction No coil between MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect combination 6616 Instruction below is not connected to bus line STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6617 6618 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop i ee l STL RET MC MCR interrupt pointer or IRET This error occurs when a combination of instructions is incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of instructions is incorrect Numbers of FOR and NEXT instructions do not match Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their No NEXT instruction mutual relationship becomes correct 6619 6620 Stops 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded operation No MC instruction No MCR instruction STL instruction is continuously used 9 times or more 6626 Invalid instruction is programmed within STL RET loop MC MCR interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6627 No STL instruction Invalid instruction is used in main program interrupt pointer SRET or IRET No P or interrupt pointer No SRET or IRET instruction STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine SRET programmed in invalid location 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 FEND programmed in invalid locat
95. of register Parallel Link Parallel link error time out check ee time 500 ms D18071 10 BOTS 3 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function D 80744 D 8075 D 8076 4 D 80774 D 8078 4 D 80794 D 80804 D 8081 D 80824 D 8083 D 80844 D 8085 4 D 80864 D 8087 4 D 80884 D 80894 D 80904 D 8091 4 D 80924 D 8093 4 D 80944 D 8095 4 D 8096 Lower 004 Pulse width Pulse period D 80974 10 us unit 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Lower 1X000 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 us unit Lower 1x000 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 us unit Lower X000 Pulse width Pulse period 10 us unit Lower X001 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 us unit Lower X001 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 us unit Lower X001 Pulse width Pulse period 10 us unit X003 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 us unit Lower X003 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 us unit Lower 1x003 Pulse width Pulse period 10 us unit X004 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6 us unit Lower M8076 M8080 M8077 M8081 M8078 M8082 M8079 M8083 X004 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6 us unit Memory Information Everson 1 40 l F X3GC Series 2K steps 4K steps 8K steps 16K steps 32 32K steps D 8101 PLC type and D 8102 Number of special function blocks i connected 242
96. of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not a stick out Eas z z Do not solder plate the electric wire ends k A mm 0 36 e Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the electric wire referring to the outline drawing e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve Insulating sleeve Contact area Crimp area Aayeg lt Reference gt Manufacturer Caulking tool 4 0 F 2 6mm CRIMPFOX 6 011 i Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPEOX 6T F 4 0 11 14mm 0 56 Ei O On 3 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 SF 4 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 ae S0 a 87 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector 4 Tool e For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the table on the previous page use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 0 4mm With straight tip 2 5mm 0 02 0 1 ste gt k lt Reference gt
97. or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of u
98. product M3 screws for power supply terminal CC Link connection terminal M3 5 screws for CC Link connection terminal block mounting screws black e The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 57 O D SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 ou ousg Q suoneolyoads SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories FX3uU 64CCL POWER FX3u 64CCL 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch i _ 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 FX2N 16CCL M 2 04 5 mounting holes 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 75 2 96 mounting hole pitch 85 3 35 Unit mm inches MASS Weight Model name kg Ibs Approx 0 3 FX3U 64CCL 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Label for indication of special unit block number Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product e Accessories e Terminal block M3 screws for power supply terminal CC Link connection terminal M3 5 screws for CC Link connection terminal block mounting screws black e The extension
99. protection circuits insert an 8 external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product life sf 1 DC circuit 2 Connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode for commutation must comply with the following Inductive load 4 specifications PLC output Yy Item Guide contact Diode _ S S Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage for commutation i Forward current Load current or more ae 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber combined CR components O S e such as a surge killer and spark killer etc parallel to the Inductive load a ep ee PLC output S Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable contaci for the load being used Refer to the table below for other Pete a specifications Item Guide Electrostatic capacity Approx 0 1 uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 7 ssf 3 Interlock ae For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a Inter Limit of normal ET hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously lock _ rotation 3 an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC output PLC s internal programs as shown to the right contact 8 PLC output Limit of reverse a contact rotation 3 v S 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an i
100. specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 93 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey GO Ww O O h O O N SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddns samod ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIO9dS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Selection of the external DC power supply to prepare 4 1 Selection of the external DC power supply to prepare 4 1 1 Power supply specifications This subsection explains the power supply input specification of the main unit and extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V For the power consumption of special function blocks requiring the external power supply refer to the manual of the corresponding product Specification Item Supply voltage 24 V DC 20 15 Allowable instantaneous Operation can be continued upon occurrence of an instantaneous power failure for 5 ms or less power failure time Power fuse 125 V 3 15 A Rush current 30 A max 0 5 ms 24 V DC i 1w Power consumption 2 When extension blocks are connected max 25 W 5 V DC built in pow
101. speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 8 9 1 Specifications Item FX 16EYR ES TB UL Terminal block M3 5 screw Connection form The connection with the PLC is the connector Output type Relay External power supply 250 V AC or less 30 V DC or less ee Resistance load 2 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 8 A or less ax loa Inductive load 80 VA Min load 5 V DC 2 mA Reference value Open circuit leakage current Response time 1 Approx 10 ms Circuit isolation Mechanical isolation Operation indicators LED lights when relay coil power is supplied Power consumption 1 92 W 80 mA 24 V DC input output circuitry CN1 Connector side External wiring 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 184 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 9 FX 16EYR ES TB UL 8 9 2 Internal circuit lt 5 O _ oO lt 6zi 02 ag gt N sag OOOO A R S A gt No RASS gt i p gt gt rereke lpoloo AeA ER aE lt I DS EAE T om0 1 2 3 04 5 6 7 a40 1 2 3 a44 5 6 7
102. switch ALM Red 21 FX3UC FX2NC extension block connecting holes 7 POW LED On while the PLC power is ON RUN LED On while the PLC is RUN Flashing when a program error occurs ERR LED Turns ON when a CPU error occurs Turns ON when the battery voltage drops EES When the optional battery is used 22 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 3 Interpretation of Model Names Main Units I O Extension Blocks 1 3 Interpretation of Model Names Main Units I O Extension Blocks L A 8 et E l Total number of MESA Input output a Series name Classification2 I O points Classification type 2 om 3 Classification Symbol Description D S D D FX3GC FX3GC Series p A Series name FX2NC FX2NC Series FX2N FX2N Series Total number of P ND js I O points ie ne os oe 32000 32 Points S S 8 O C Classification 1 5 Ee Input output extension blocks Input output mixed Input 24 V DC Sink 4 Output Relay oy 3 8 2 S5 Nn lt Input output mixed T DSS Input 24 V DC Sink Source Output Transistor Source D Input output type Input dedicated Classification 2 None 24 V DC Input Classification 2 UA1 UL 100 V AC Input ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS Dedicated 5 V DC Input 3 X X Y Dedicated relay output Y Y 16 2 M T Input output mixed T D Input 24 V DC Sink Output Transistor Sink L R T S C
103. terminal are used without remote running stopping operation from the programming software The RUN STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table Condition of built in RUN Condition of general purpose input terminal specified as RUN Status of PLC STOP switch terminal by parameter OFF RUN RUN OFF STOP STOP Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP switch to STOP When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in the STOP position If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status by giving the RUN command from the programming software This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 10 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running UNO 10 3 1 Self diagnostic fun
104. the CC Link intelligent device station special 09R718 volume __ User s Manual function block Supplied Details on handling the CC Link remote device station Ke with FX2N 32CCL JY997D52401 special function block i Installation Manual When using refer also to the FX2N 32CCL User s Manual Separate EASE CUE JY992D71801 Details on the CC Link remote device station special 09R711 volume User s Manual function block Supplied Remote I O station remote For details on CC Link remote I O stations remote device stations and v with device station and intelligent intelligent device station refer to the relevant manuals and related product device station for CC Link documents Supplied FX2N 64CL M A the CC Link LT master special 2 n ia vrei When using refer also to the FX2N 64CL M User s j product product Volume Manual Detailed Volume Saia FX2N 64CL M v es User s Manual Detailed JY997D08501 Details on the CC Link LT master special function block Volume Remote device station remote I O station power supply adapter and power supplies for CC Link LT For details on CC Link LT remote I O stations remote device stations power supply adapters and CC Link LT dedicated power supplies refer to the relevant manuals and related documents Supplied v with product Details on handling the FX3u 128ASL M AnyWireASLINK series master block When using refer also to the FX3U 128ASL M User s Manual
105. the system 96 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Example External Wiring e Example of the FX3Gc 32MT DSS UNO Special adaptor Analog 24V DC Circuit Protector N OM FX3Gc 32MT DSS Power supply ON a nN du 2 Mc T Emergency 3 FX2NC FX3uc i Stop special function VO block MAN connector J OTT i 3 S a om 1 2 S MC MC os ES eee eee E n FX2nc OOEYT DSS S DC es DC FX2Nc 16EYR T DS Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals ndu OW FX2NC CNV IF SUOI eOIIOedS As for the details of emergency stop operation see DESIGN in PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field indino FX2n OO EX ES UL g 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 2 The same power source for the main unit extension power supply units special adapters and special function blocks is preferable 7 When using the different power source from the main unit turn ON the peripheral devices power 2 simultaneously or earlier than the main unit s When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the 2 6 system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same Des time Be 3 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc 4 Use a fuse suitable for the system 8 2 Caution
106. unit number labels o Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the unit numbers can be identified 8 D RIL N 7 WBS a w Y818D33101 33 NORO Aayeg POWER FX3u 16CCL M _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 53 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 1 1 Main units Unit mm inches a MASS Weight kg Ibs Approx 0 2 FX3GC 32MT D 0 44lbs Approx 0 2 FX3GC 32MT DSS 0 44lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width only 90 3 55 e Accessories 1 FX3Gc 32MT D FX2NC 100MPCB power supply cable 1 m 3 33 FX2NC 100BPCB power supply cable 1 m 3 33 Manual supplied with product 2 FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC 100MPCB power supply cable 1 m 3 33 Manual supplied with product 0 52 2 1 2 FX2NC series input output extension block 1 Connector type MASS Weight Unit mm inches A FX2NC 16EYT Approx 0 15 FX2NC 16EX DS 0 33lbs FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 32EX B FX2NC 32EYT Approx 0 2 FX2NC 32EX DS 0 44lbs FX2NC 32EYT DSS 90 3 55 90 3 55 e Ins
107. 0 to X017 X020 to X057 Input Output Main unit extension extension FX3U 128ASL M E 010104 01010 4 Y000 to Y017 Y020 to Y057 l 32 0 0 32 16 16 32 points 32 points 32 points 8 points AnyWireASLINK system Number of input output points occupied by special function units blocks 8 points 0 points 96 104 4 Number of _ remaining points ee ST Cera Number of remote I O Number of input output points excluding remote I O points on AnyWireASLINkK points 32 points Number of input output occupied points Up to 128 points v v 224 256 points Number of remaining points see e e e e e e e e e e e e Number of AnyWireASLINK input output points Up to 128 points 256 points or less in total p di 2 When using 27 remote I O points 8 points x 3 2 points 1 point shown above assign 32 or more input output points using the rotary switch of the AnyWireASLINK master 38 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 9 Calculation of 5 V DC power supply capacity current consumption 1 9 Calculation of 5 V DC power supply capacity current consumption Confirm the current consumption using the following procedures When the main unit built in power supply is insufficient add an extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V in accordance with the necessity Only one extension power supply unit can be connected in a sys
108. 008 M 8009 ON when 24 V DC power fails in i 24 V DC down special function block Number and name Operation and function Clock 18010 a BEN ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle ON 5 ms OFF 5 ms pulse MaA ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle ON 50 ms OFF 50 ms pulse M 8013 ON and OFF in 1sec cycle 1sec clock pulse ON 500 ms OFF 500 ms M 8014 ON and OFF in 1min cycle 1min clock pulse ON 30 sec OFF 30sec M 8015 Clock stop and preset For real time clock Time read display is stopped NEOG For real time clock 30 seconds correction MSU For real time clock IMJ8018 Installation detection Always ON For real time clock Real time clock RTC error wane For real time clock Flag M 8020 ON when the result of addition Zero subtraction is 0 M 8021 ON when the result of subtraction is Borrow less than the min negative number M 8022 ON when carry occurs as a result Car of addition or when an overflow y occurs as a result of shift operation MB028 M8024 BMOV direction specification FNC 15 M 8025 to M 8027 Not used Interrupt permission during FROM M 8028 TO FNC 78 and 79 instruction execution N9025 ON when operation such as DSW Instruction FNC 72 is completed execution complete 14 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Correspond ing special device 234 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of
109. 1 AA3 AA5 AA7 3 24 000 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG 24 F lt sm en ea esVesienieslenfesiesiesealen a I Pe Lee Bae 9 Fuse a P sensor oA ala DC 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 173 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 8 5 3 Example of output external wiring sink wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to the FX3Gc 32MT D FX2nc LILJEYT and FX2N 16EYT C output connector O00 to OO7 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos PLC s COM output No 001 oo3 005 oo7 AA1 AA3 AAS AA7 Vacant oo oo2 0o04 oo6 AAO 442 AA4 AAG ee leeriesiesl Tastes estan E l 1 COM1 COM2 or COM3 in accordance with connected connector 24V 174 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL 8 6 FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL UNO Connect the FX 16E TB FX 32E TB to the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Input connector Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LINIEX DS FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIDIEYT DSS 8 6 1 Internal circuit NO lobe SUOISUBWUIG O0 0 to OO 7
110. 12 Y013 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y017 go eee ed ee ee eo PE E E 7 i i J2 Ja Ji j2 in the case of transistor output os n ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output transistor output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT DSS suoneayoadg FX3GC 32MT DSS Transistor output Source Tt je Je Je jr fe 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output D 5S 3 oe Q Q Auayeg CO 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 161 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 2 Output extension block Example of program aon 100 ravon Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit and a transistor output sink only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2Nc 16EYT FX3GC 32MT D Transistor output sink COMO COMO Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Yo25 Yo26 Y027 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output
111. 2 v v O Se 9 3 a 217 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes Error code PLC operation at error occurrence Contents of error Operation error M8067 D8067 6740 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 Continues operation Sampling time TS lt Scan time Integral result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 value variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 lt Step response method gt Improper auto tuning result lt Step response method gt Auto tuning operation direction mismatch lt Step response method gt Improper auto tuning result lt Limit cycle method gt Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt Abnormal auto tuning transfer status Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally overwritten lt Limit cycle method gt Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement time ton gt t ton lt 0 t lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from 0 to 32767 Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV Deviation exceeds limi
112. 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Receive sum calculated result RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum Not used ad Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP MODBUS communication ch1 D 8400 D 8401 D 8402 D 8403 D 8404 D 8405 D 8406 D 8407 D 8408 D 8409 D 8410 D 8411 D 8412 D 8413 D 8414 D 8415 to D 8418 D 8419 Communication format Protocol Communication error code M8402 Error details M8403 Error step number Communication format display Not used Step number being executed Current retry value Slave response timeout Turn around delay Message to message delay Number of retries Not used Slave node address Not used Communication mode Number and name Content of register MODBUS communication ch2 D 8420 D 8421 D 8422 D 8423 D 8424 D 8425 D 8426 D 8427 D 8428 D 8429 D 8430 D 8431 D 8432 D 8433 D 8434 D 8435 to D 8438 D 8439 Communication format Protocol Communication error code Error details Error step number Communication format display Not used Step number being executed Current retry value Slave response timeout Turn around delay Message to message delay Number of retries Not used Slave node address Not used Communication mode FX3U ENET ADP ch1 D 8400 D 8401 2 D 8402 2 D 8403 2 D 8404 2 D
113. 20 0 ccccccceeceeceeceeceeeeesee cesses eeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeessaeeeeesaaes 228 Appendix A 3 2 Setting in GX WOrkS2 sisi reseree i fete nde dali ceca dee desde need alee hed ees ese ieee 228 Appendix A 4 Cautions on using FA transparent function in GOT1000 Series 068 229 Appendix A 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 230 Appendix A 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability ccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeens 231 Appendix A 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability 0 ccc ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesaeeeeesanes 231 Appendix B Performance Specifications 232 Appendix C Operation of Special Devices 234 Appendix C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 cc eeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesees 234 Appendix C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 eee eecceeeseeeee eens eeeeeeseeeeeees 241 Appendix C 3 Analog special adapters special devices ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaes 248 Appendix C 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 cccccceccccceeceeceeeeeceeceeseeeeesseeeesseeeeesanes 248 Appendix C 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8299 0 0 eccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenens 250 Appendix D Instruction List 252 Appendix D 1 BASIC INSUUCTIONS svaucede decried i a e a hides dia at 252 Appendix D 2 Step Ladder Instructions ccccccccsscccececeee
114. 2EX DS Input connector connector Higher Higher numbers numbers Notch Notch e represents vacant terminals e represents vacant terminals Power connector o Ll 1 Red 2 Black o LI 1 Red 2 Black 1 For the handling refer to Subsection 3 6 2 Caution A power connector is not included in the FX2NC 16EX DS and FX2Nc 32EX DS 64 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout O FX2NC 16EYT O FX2NC 16EYT DSS Output connector Output connector Output Lower yo yo Higher numbers numbers Notch Y4 Y4 Lower numbers Higher numbers Notch SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 Ess represents vacant terminals represents vacant terminals gueuey Q SUOI EOIJIN8dS Output FX2NC 32EYT DSS Output connector connector Output Output Output Output Lower Higher Lower Higher numbers numbers numbers numbers Notch Notch va fva EZAR A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS e represents vacant terminals e represents vacant terminals indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS 104 Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 65 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 2 2 Terminal Lay
115. 2NC FX3U FX2N FX2N 32MT DI16EX 16EYR TI4AD CNV IF 4DA 16EX 16EYR 2 Confirmation of system configuration availability 1 Restriction in number of input output points Number of input output occupied points a Main unit Number of input output occupied points Total of a FX3GC 32MT D 32 points 32 points b I O extension block Total of b Number of input output occupied points 16 16 16 16 64 FX2NC 16EX 16 points FX2NC 16EYR T 16 points FX2N 16EX 16 points FX2N 16EYR 16 points 64 points c Connector conversion adapter Total of c Number of input output occupied points FX NG CNV IF 0 points d Special adapter Total of d Number of input output occupied points 0 0 0 FX3U 485ADP MB dali e Special function blocks Total of e Number of input output occupied points 8 8 16 a b c d e Total number of I O points 32 64 0 0 16 112 lt 128 points The I O points restriction is satisfied since the total number of input output points is less than 128 44 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration 2 Restriction in 5 V DC power supply capacity Calculate the 5 V DC power supply capacity for the main unit or extension power supply unit 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side 400mA b Consumer side FX3U 485ADP MB 20mA _ FX3U 232ADP MB 50mA FX2NC 1
116. 2Nc and terminal block type special function blocks for FX2NC FX3uc have the European type terminal block 2 Compliant electric wires and tightening torque Electric wire size Tightening stranded wire solid wire End treatment 0 3 to 0 5 mm2 e Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist the core AWG22 to 20 wires and connect the wires directly e Remove the coating from the solid wire and connect the wire directly ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS One electric wire Two electric wires 0 3 mm AWG22 x2 e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve indino WD 0 3 to 0 5 mm2 022100 2ZON M recommended product 8 Bar terminal with AWG22 to 20 Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact Co Ltd S insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline e Caulking tool i drawing of bar terminal CRIMPFOX 6 1 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd D CRIMPFOX 6T F 2 Phoenix Contact Co Ltd 1 Old model name CRIMPFOX ZA 3 T 2 Old model name CRIMPFOX UD 6 SE TE 3 Treatment of electric wire ends 23a 2 i 7 n Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve 8 Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range 8 Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions r UR AUNANI of stranded wires Ang aoe wires without coating a Senden wireicclidsnike 2 Twist the ends
117. 3 6 2ctnn Gar taihnd ee EEA AT 5 5 4 Timing of updating of current value and comparison of Current ValUC cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 5 5 5 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency ccccccssccccsseceeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeseeseesseeeeseseeeeseeeeees 121 5 5 6 Related Devices High Speed COUNTEL cccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeeseseeeeeseeeeeessaneeeeeeeas 122 5 5 7 Function switching Switching of allocation and functions of input terminals cccee 123 59 0 CAUTIONS ONS Cred oot see cecutes aa eiae a a a ouvilaskdusxsuapVeveseaxeceePvadedeh sateen chad siouves 123 96 Inpul Inter Upto lOO 16 SOE eset cel hea crake enctece a a cake eel ul coer elias 124 5 6 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration ccccseceeeeseeeeeeeees 124 5 6 2 Cautions 1OMINPUt Ne MUD OM s ree tats asec a AE 124 5 Pulse Catch M6170 1OMG17 9 cece accta te cars oo aces O Sik ater Ocean e oh celta diic edad 125 5 7 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals 060 125 5 12 CAULIONS Tor PUSE CALC Me es a aot eshte sicatonedeate Soedcacdanac dace O S 125 5 8 Pulse width Pulse period measurement FUNCTION cccccccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeesaeeeeseecesseeeseeeeeseeees 126 5 8 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers cece ce eeeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeneeeees 126 5 8 2 Cautions
118. 3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Generic name for FX2N Series special function block FX2NC Series special function block FX3UC Series special function block FX3U Series special function block Generic name for the following models FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 2LC FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A Generic name for the following models FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL FX3U 128ASL M FX3U 4AD FX3uU 4LC FX3U 4DA Generic name for the following models FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA Generic name for the following models FX3UC 4AD Abbreviation of model FX3UC 1PS 5V extension power supply unit Abbreviation of model FX3U 32BL battery Generic name for the following models FX 16E TB FX 32E TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16E TB UL FX 32E TB UL FX 16EYR ES TB UL FX 16EYT ES TB UL FX 16EYT ESS TB UL FX 16EYS ES TB UL Generic name for the following models FXON 30EC FXON 65EC Generic name for the following models FX 16E 500CAB S FX 16E LILILICAB FX 16E LILILICAB R FX A32E LIUILICAB 150 300 or 500 is entered in UOL Generic name for the following models FX2c I O CON FX2c l O CON S FX2c I O CON SA Generic name for the following models FX2NC 100MPCB FX2NcC 100BPCB FX2Nc 10BPCB1 Generic name for the following models FX3U 16CCL M FX2N 16CCL M Abbreviation of FX2N 64CL M m
119. 42 Lower pulses output to Y001 for i PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR D 8143 FNC 59 instructions D 8144 D 8145 D 8146 7 Not used D 8147 D 8148 D 8149 Correspond ing special device Number and name Content of register Inverter Communication Function Response wait time of inverter 3 D 8150 communication ch1 SOULWIOJIOd W Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch1 Default 1 Error code for inverter communication ch1 D 8151 M8151 D 8152 4 M8152 Inverter communication error step number latched ch1 Default 1 Not used D 8153 M8153 D 8154 Response wait time of inverter 3 D 8155 communication ch2 Step number of instruction during inverter communication ch2 Default 1 Error code for inverter communication ch2 D 8156 M8156 D 8157 M8157 Inverter communication error step number latched ch2 Default 1 Not used D 8158 M8158 D 8159 m 3 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Advanced Function D 8160 D 8161 D 8162 D 8163 D 8164 D 8165 D 8166 D 8167 D 8168 D 8169 Not used Access restriction status 2 5 Access restriction status All online operation k k 7 ane protection Present Access restriction program Monitor SUES Ei value status Read ing value a9 change H 00 8 2nd keyword is not set v 6 6 H 10
120. 45 4S 24V DC I I I I I x001V x003V x005V x007 a X002 X004 X006 Connect pull down resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W Q 4 4 i 7 y C B SRR when using inputs i elo HE Slee Ss Slelclele X000 to X007 F CLK gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt X lt FX2NC 16EYT DSS Source input Transistor output Source FX3GC 32MT DSS JE x Ojo 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 157 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus GO SUOI EOIJINedS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI EOIIOedS indino ep xe O h O O gt N JO Bulli Jo sejdwex sesp SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Input Matrix MTR FNC 52 3 Input extension block Output extension block Example of program 000 Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit a sink only input type input extension block and a transistor output sink only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D input extension block FX2NC 16EX output extension block FX2NC 16EYT 0 1A50V J g Jo J Je J gt je JS JD diode is 2 J Ja 12 J Ja 12 necessary A A A A A A A A X021 Y X023V X025V X027 24V
121. 485ADP MB FX3u ENET ADP FX3u 4AD ADP FX3u 4DA ADP FX3u 3A ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PTW ADP FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3UC 1PS 5V Models MELSEC FX2ncC series manufactured FX2NC 16EX DS FX2NC 32EX DS FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 32EYT DSS FX2Nc 16EX T DS FX2Nc 16EYR T DS Models MELSEC FXa2N series manufactured FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYS Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Attention e This product is designed for use in industrial applications Note e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germ
122. 5 1 Sink and source input 24 V DC input type 5 1 Sink and source input 24 V DC input type Inputs X in the FX3cc 32MT D are sink input type only Inputs X in the FX3GC 32MT DSS are sink source common input type Inputs in FX2N FX2NC Series input output extension blocks are either sink input type only or sink source common input type depending on the product Sink input common An input DC input signal used where the current flows out of the input X terminal is called a sink input NPN open collector transistor outputs are available when transistor output type sensor outputs are connected e Examples of the FX3Gc 32MT D e Examples of the FX3Gc 32MT DSS 1 Input impedance Source input common An input DC input signal used where the current flows into the input X terminal is called a source input PNP open collector transistor outputs are available when transistor output type sensor outputs are connected e Examples of the FX3Gc 32MT DSS 1 Input impedance How to change a sink input for a source input for the FX3Gc 32MT DSS Sink inputs and the source inputs can be changed over in the FX3GC 32MT DSS by connection as follows Sink input Selected by the connection that makes the current flow out of the input X terminal Source input Selected by the connection that makes the current flow into the input X terminal Instructions for using e Concurrent use of sink source input Inp
123. 6 10 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running ccccccecccseeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeseneeees 207 10 371 Sel diaGnOStiG TUNCHON 1 2 cote e i Matias ee a E E Ra 207 10 32 TSU TMINCUONS arsso a E R 207 10 3 3 Program Modification TUNGO sia os et ee E A 207 10 4 Ma intenant Enisi E a N soar aeeen pares cacbanenedees 208 10AT Penodi INS DC CHOI arniran a E A 208 104 2 Product life of relay contacts csrl a a Ea a aE R 209 10 5 Troubleshooting WHIA EEDS sieisen iig aa a a a cies a a GATA 210 oT FOV EBD OA aS O OM a ae a 210 T02 ALM ECEB Oia ON aruna a a a 210 19 53 ERR GED Om asho ene ner a a teh a N 211 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ccccceeccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 212 10 6 1 Operation and check by GX Works2 cccccccccsesscecccesseeeceeeeeececaeseeeeseeseeessueseeessaaeseessenseeeesaags 212 1 0 6 2 Representation Of Emors oasis inisesin enea veer aa Reet eee ee tee doe eed et a a 213 10 6 3 Error Code List and Action satocs cctiscts ac cokes eatusencndtehtato sec hele atbocadackdit ernest abiadeehteceaeateedute 214 10 7 Troubleshooting sissie e eR 221 10 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks nnnnn0nnnnannnnnnnnennnn 221 10 7 2 24 V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 0068 221 10 7 3 Cautions in registering Keywords nana Ie A a EEE 222 Appendix A Version Information a
124. 63 Not used D8438 Not used D8449 Serial communication error 2 ch2 Special block error flag Not used Not used DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions Y000 eros Clear signal device specification function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 M 8465 instructions Y001 D8465 Clear signal device specification function enabled MAG to IMAG 3 4 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON Error Detection M18468 to ese Special parameter error M 8489 M 8490 to M 8511 Not used 5 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later FX3U ENET ADP ch1 ch2 MIBAS0 to Ae 6 IP address storage area write Took 6 IP address storage area clear M 8496 completion M 8498 IP address change function enable flag 6 Supported in Ver 2 10 or later 240 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D851 1 Appendix C 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and name PLC Status D 8000 Watchdog timer D 8001 PLC type and system version D 8002 Memory capacity D 8003 Memory type D 8004 Error number M D 8005 Battery voltage D 8006 Low battery voltage detection level D 8007 D 8008 D 8009 Content of register Default value is 200 ms in 1ms steps Writes from system ROM at power ON Value overwritten by program is valid after E
125. 6763 Input X specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already Input interrupt used in another instruction High speed counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8170 to M8175 SPD instruction 6764 Pulse output number is already used in a positioning Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc driven by another positioning instruction 6765 Number of applied instruction exceeds limit TARDEO Nee ae apples UNO IS he aie program exceeds the specified limit 6770 Something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult Memory access error ee your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Special block error M8449 D8449 020 021 0022 1 Verify that extension cables are correctly connected 026 1026 Continues This error occurs in the execution of operation operation e Review the program and check the contents of the 4 operands used in applied instructions L080 PR ONS EROE e Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Check the cable connection between the programming Peripheral equipment access error panel PP programming device and the PLC e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected 1 The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit block error is put in DO Oog0 219 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoleolj
126. 6EX 80mA FX2NC 16EYR T 130mA FX3UC 4AD 100mA 230mA FX2NC CNV IF 230mA FX3U 4DA 120mA 350mA FX2N 16EX 395mA FX2N 16EYR 435mA a Supplier side b Consumer side 400mA 435mA 35mA It is necessary to add an extension power supply unit since the capacity on the consumer side b is 35 mA larger than the capacity on the supplier side a Refer to Subsection 1 12 1 Restriction for the number of connectable units a Special adapter The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 2 communication special adapters and up to 2 analog special adapters There is no problem with this configuration since only 2 communication special adapters are connected b Input output extension block and special function block The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 2 special function blocks when the extension power supply unit is not used Up to 4 input output extension blocks and special function blocks in total can be connected after the FX2NC CNV IF There is no problem here because only 2 special function blocks are connected which is within the maximum number of connectable units There is no problem because only 3 input output extension blocks and special function blocks in total are connected after the FX2NC CNV IF c Other restrictions In some models only up to 4 units or 5 units in certain conditions can be connected to a single main unit When connecting 5 or more units it is necessary to add an extens
127. 7D14901 function block i caut Installation Manual When using refer also to the FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U p FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied P with PAN SAD JY992D65201 Details on handling the 4 ch analog input special i User s Guide function block product Supplied y with PANE AAN JY997D07801 Details on handling the 4 ch analog input special product User s Manual function block Supplied y with PON BAD JY992D86001 Details on handling the 8 ch analog input special 09R608 User s Manual function block also used for thermocouple input product Supplied Details on handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature sensor n an FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4997014701 input special adapter radici User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U p FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Details on handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature sensor n a FX3U 4AD PTW ADP JY997p29404 input special adapter aia User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U p FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied Details on handling the 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 A ae FX3U 4AD PNK ADP JY997D29201 temperature sensor input special adapter A odua User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U p FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied FX2N 4AD PT Details on handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature sensor v with JY992D65601 produci Us
128. 8398 Ring counter operation D8398 M9392 specification in units of 1ms 32 bits D8399 oJ M8353 O01 Forward Tmi M6396 M 8354 Y001 Reverse limit 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when E M 8355 Y001 DOG signal logic reverse RS2 instruction chO is OFF ro l 3 Ims ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 Fg M8356 Y001 Zero point signal logic turns ON eae e reverse w S 8887 R82 FNC 87 et ss M8358 Y001 Positioning instruction M 8400 z activation M 8401 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag G x M 8359 Y001 Pulse output stop command M8402 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request D8402 292 MIB60 to IMIE36S RSD FNC 7 icht TE 4 Z 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP M 8403 Receive complete flag Bue aoe Q h RS2 FNC 87 ch1 g ees Carrier detection flag i 5 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 MIRAOS Data set ready DSR flag M 8406 M 8407 Not used M 8408 M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 i Time out check flag 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF 239 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Number and f Operation and function ing special name device RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 M18410 to M18420 M 8421 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send wait flag M 84221 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 S
129. A b Consumer side FX3U 485ADP MB 20mA FX3U 4AD ADP 35mA FX2NC 16EX 80mA FX2NC 16EYT 130mA FX2NC 16EYR T 180mA FX2NC 16EYR T 230mA a Supplier side b Consumer side 400mA 230mA 170mA gt OmA There is no problem since the total current consumption is less than the capacity 400 mA supplied by the main unit 50 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration Extension power supply unit side 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side FX3UC 1PS 5V 1A 1000mA b Consumer side FX2N 64CL M 190mA 190mA 2 OM daca 3 a Ee 2 a Supplier side b Consumer side 1000mA 190mA 810mA gt OmA a There is no problem since the total current consumption is less than the capacity 1A 1000 mA supplied by the extension power supply unit gueuey Q 4 Restriction for the number of connectable units a Special adapter 4 There is no problem since the components are not changed on b Input output extension block and special function block Ss The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 8 special function blocks when the extension power supply unit is used Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected in the range where the power is supplied from the ndu QT main unit Y Up to 4 input output extension blocks and special function blocks in tot
130. A ADP FX3U 3A ADP A a pprox 0 FX3U 4AD PT ADP 0 22Ibs FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 1 When an analog special adapter is connected to the FX3Gc PLC direct screw mounting is not possible Model name MASS Weight g Ibs FX3U 232ADP MB ae e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws e Accessories Manual supplied with product e RS 232C connector D SUB 9 pin male 1 When the FX3U 232ADP MB is connected to the FX3Gc PLC direct screw mounting is not possible Model name MASS Weight g Ibs FX3U 485ADP MB eee i e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 Label for indication of link station number Manual supplied with product e Accessories e Terminal block European type e Terminal resistance 330 9 110 Q built in 2 When the FX3U 485ADP MB is connected to the FX3Gc PLC direct screw mounting is not possible 60 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories FX3U ENET ADP 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Model name MASS Weight 2 kg Ibs Approx 0 1 FX3U ENET ADP 0 22Ibs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or scr
131. A1 TB 2 100 V AC input type nding OD EARS 24 V DC ae E E FX2NC LIDEYT 2 S TB 3 O FX 16EYT TB Transistor output sink type FX2N 16EYT C 24V DC 3 FX 16EYS TB 3 Triac output type 112 mA S Connected to sink source common input type or source only output transistor output type main unit or I O extension block FX 16E TB UL 16 input points or 16 output points FX3GC 32MT DSS 7 32 input points Connects directly to PLC input FX2NC OOEX DS 4 FX 32E TB UL 32 output points output terminals FX2NC OOEYT DSS S 4 or 16 input amp 16 output O33 points 2 SP 24VDC Q FX 16EYR ES TB UL 3 Relay output type 80 mA o e FX 16EYT ES TB UL 3 e Eo Transistor output sink type FXSGC 32MT DSS FX2NC OOEYT DSS 24V DC FX 16EYT ESS TB UL 3 C Transistor output source type 412 mA FX 16EYS ES TB 3 Oos e Triac output type 1 The table below shows the drive power supply for each connection destination Connection destination Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption Input connector FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX Not required FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIIEX DS FX2N 16EX C 24 V DC 112 mA 16 points Output connector FX3GC 32MT D FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC OOEYT FX2NC LILIEYT DSS FX2N 16EYT C 9 g 5 Power supply suitable to connected load is required Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 165 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and Ext
132. ADR Load From ER 291 to 293 294 RWER Rewrite to ER 295 to 299 254 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers E Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition gt re F eir ne Appendix E Discontinued models The table below lists the discontinued MELSEC F Series PLC models and programming tools described in B this manual DV DZ Discontinued model Repair acceptance period Sa FX3U 232ADP September 30 2013 Until September 30 2020 FX3U 485ADP FX PCS WIN E March 31 2013 FX 20P E December 31 2012 Until December 31 2019 FX 10DU E FX2N 16CCL M Until September 30 2019 FX 10P Until June 30 2015 FX 232AW Until September 30 2011 FX 232AWC Until June 30 2011 oo S S O oo S a op O 14 Q v O iq O iq n 5 n Q es O I n sj pow penuljucosiq Kayeq 10 suoynesaig TI uonepodsue G s e s Jequiew nq ul saveyeq jo Buljpuey 255 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers E Discontinued models User s Manual Hardware Edition MEMO 256 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers F Precautions for Battery Transportation User s Manual Hardware Edition F 1 Regulated FX3GC Series products Appendix F Precautions for Battery Transportation When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations The batteries for the FX3Gc Series CPU unit are classified as shown in followi
133. AnyWireASLINK master is used the total number of input output points 128 points or less of the remote I O stations connected on the network and the number of input output points calculated in the previous step must be 256 or less For details refer to the following subsection 1 FX3uU 16CCL M FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master Calculate the number of remote I O points connected on the network in the following step When a CC Link master is used refer to Subsection 1 8 2 FX3U 128ASL M AnyWireASLINK master Calculate the number of remote I O points connected on the network in the following step When an AnyWireASLINK master is used refer to Subsection 1 8 3 by 36 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points 1 8 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points The maximum number of available input output points is as follows when CC Link master block is used For the method of calculating the number of I O points refer to Subsection 1 8 1 Maximum number of Number of input Number of input output CC Linkremae NO input output points output points occupied points x 8 x32 3120 256 points A B C D units pois E stations points S points Total number of points obtained by formula 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe A humpe gt Total num
134. B driver It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the USB driver installation method and procedure refer to the following manual Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Appendix A 3 2 Setting in GX Works2 1 Double click the Connection Destination view gt Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 The Transfer Setup Connection is displayed 2 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Serial Setting 3 Select USB Transfer Setup Connection1 A C side Tj A 4 PC side I F ir Aa CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet CC IE Field Q Series NET IT PLC NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board Board Boar arl taf Double click it PLC side I F EJ IE Cont CC Link Ethernet C24 GOT CC IE Field CC IE Field H Module Module Master Local Communication le Module Head Module afl PLC Mode FXCPU PC side I F Serial Setting i m PC side I F Serial Setting R5 232C Connection Channel List e po ogo No Specification include Fx USB AW FX3U UISB BD Cancel C USB Setup Time Out Sec 5 COM Port com 1 v EEN PLC Type Network Transmission Speed 115 2kbps v ji Communication Route include FX USB AW f FX3U USB BD PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connectiopwrest
135. C Input SPECICATION S srnec a a cena et ice eae 101 5 22 Input Derating CUNE serma e a O E 103 529 Handing or 24V DCU uree a OEE E Aa 103 5 2 4 Instructions for connecting input CEVICES cecccccsseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeessaeeeees 105 5 2 0 Examples Of external WINO aranista ee et Fe ee ee 107 523 O VDC Input I XZN TOEXL C sect a ce set alee td itn eles et niet a ta etal ale hi ae oekewioe 110 5 3 1 5 V DC input SPECIFICATIONS 0 0 0 cecccceeecccceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeseeeceseeseesseceeseeeeseeeessuseeeessneeees 110 592 Handing O or V DO I OU ae ie ccc cen aa maa eek because eee eee sondane 110 5 3 3 Example of external wiring ccccccssscecccessececcceueeeccsauseeecceuseeecseueeeessauseeesseusesessuageeessusssageeeees 111 54 AG input FX2N BEX UATU is sia ace ect ha aces sac sgcenee we tee ee eae ee em ese ena 112 Ses Gey 2 N18 19 SPECIGI NON eee nto Ce a eee eee eee 112 942 Handling or 100 VAC MPU x35 2cccdt ce eee aE E A E A dsc 112 54 3 Example Of extemal WINO sashes ecco a ont tare eho EN 113 5 5 High speed Counters C235 10 C 255 eae cg eect iiuca tea a sian loinc a i 114 5 5 1 High speed counter type and device NUMDET cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeas 114 5 5 2 Allocation of device numbers to input NUMDETSS ccccecccesecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeessneeeees 116 5 5 6 Handling of High speed Counters 22
136. C LILIEX FX2N 16EX C The applications shown below are not supported High speed processing Time division input Other Specifications Unsupported Applications High speed counter input interruption pulse catch pulse width pulse period measurement function speed detection SPD instruction Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Absolute current value read ABS instruction Item Connection form input type Input signal voltage Input signal current Input impedance FX 16EX A1 TB Terminal block M3 5 screw The connection with the PLC is the connector AC input 100 to 120 V AC 10 15 50 60 Hz 4 7 mA 100 V AC 50 Hz 6 2 mA 110 V AC 60 Hz Approx 21 kQ 50 Hz Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz po ON 3 8 mA 80 V AC or more EE S OFF 1 7 mA 30 V AC or more Response time i Input signal format Circuit isolation Operation indicators Power consumption Input output circuitry 25 to 30 ms Voltage contact Photocoupler isolation No input LEDs equipped with 24 V power supply LED indicator 1 2 W 48 mA 24 V DC Photo coupler CN1 100V Connector AC side Terminal block ye External wiring 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 2 3 9 W 160 mA 24 V DC is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C 178 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition
137. C or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load Micro current load l Surge Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for Beenie the load being used Refer to the table below for other specifications Item Standard Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1 uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a Inter Limit of omai Gy hazardous condition could result if switched ON K a lock rotation Normal simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for NO rotation interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the lt fos Reverse right j a Limit of reverse rotation OUP rotation element 144 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Triac SSR Output FX2N 16EYS 4 In phase O PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner NO jeu19 x3 SUOISUSWIG 6 3 4 Example of external wiring gueuey GO WD O FX3Gc 32MT D 8 Sto L a a S VDC oa toad Em A _ Lt L Fuse Y001 4 3 e Vacant terminal ae ae 85 Bg O O FX2Nc CNV IF 22 FX2N 16EYS Breaker AC power supply 100 200V AC O O ndu QI
138. C power supply capacity The 5 V DC power supply capacity is as follows after the countermeasures Main unit side 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side 400mA b Consumer side a Supplier side b Consumer side 400mA 230mA 170mA gt OmA There is no problem since the total current consumption is less than the capacity 400 mA supplied by the main unit Extension power supply unit side 5 V DC power supply capacity and current consumption a Supplier side FX3UC 1PS 5V 1A 1000mA b Consumer side FX3U 4DA 120mA FX2N 16EX 165mA FX2N 16EYR 205mA a Supplier side b Consumer side 1000mA 205mA 795mA gt OmA There is no problem since the total current consumption is less than the capacity 1 A 1000 mA supplied by the extension power supply unit 46 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration 3 Restriction for the number of connectable units a Special adapter There is no problem since the components are not changed 2 b Input output extension block and special function block The FX3Gc 32MT D can be connected with up to 8 special function blocks when the extension power Ol supply unit is used 3 a Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected in the range where the power is supplied from the a main unit 7 Up to 4 input output extension block
139. Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 7 Function switching Switching of allocation and functions of input terminals UNO When the counters C248 C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters N Counter No Function switching method Details of change om M8388 ao D i 5 gt C248 OP KOOO e Reset input is not given WMG M8388 EE T ge C253 OP KOOO Reset input is not given S M8388 po 18395 The input count 2 phase 2 count changes as follows S S Phase A Changes from X000 to X006 V o C254 OP KOOO Phase B Changes from X001 to X007 oS C254 Reset input is not given os Start input is not given indu 5 5 8 Cautions on use SUOI eOIIOedS For programming details refer to the Programming Manual e Ifthe operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch the counter may malfunction due to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce indino e The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 us X000 X001 X003 X004 or 50 us X002 X005 X006 X007 Accordingly it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 input filter adjustment The
140. D 5 o O 5 D 2 Treatment of electric wire ends e When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is Twist the end of the stranded cable so that loose wires will not stick out Do not solder plate the end of the cable SUOI EOIJIN9dS 9aUas Approx 8 mm Most 4 BS 3 Tightening torque 2 S Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 4 to 0 5 Nem us Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range ae Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Caution ndu OW When tightening a grounding terminal use a screwdriver suitable for the terminal screw The screwdriver which does not suit the thread groove is used tightening torque will not be able to be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the above use the following screwdriver or an appropriate replacement SUOI eOIIOedS lt Reference gt 6 Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SDIK PHO 9008560000 S5 Weidmuller Interface GmbH amp Co KG SD 0 6x3 5x100 9008330000 wn gam SASA cas wn D 3 D uJ S 2 Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 91 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system ope
141. D ON OFF 25 Extension For FX2NC Series 0 2 ms or less 100 mA D block For FX2N Series 0 2 ms or less 200 mA Output circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation 3 Output operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven ne D Output circuit configuration 4 OU O O 3 BL os DS 1 The response time is as follows in the FX2N 8EYT H OFF ON 0 2 ms or less 1 A ON OFF 0 4 ms or less 1 A ndu QT ep O D Q QO A lt O 5 7 yndjno suoeoyinads Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 131 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 3 Transistor Output Specifications Source output type The table below shows the output specifications of the FX3GCc 32MT DSS FX2N FX2Nc output extension blocks source output type Outputs in the main unit are restricted by the simultaneous ON ratio For the restriction in simultaneous ON ratio refer to Subsection 6 2 3 Item Transistor output source specifications FX3GC 32MT DSS 16 points FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 8 points Number of output points FX2N 16EYT ESS UL fe eaint FX2NC 16EYT DSS oe FX2NC 32EYT DSS 32 points FX3GC 32MT DSS SIRSE ETE FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 32EYT pss_ Connector Output type form Transistor Source out
142. DC X022 X024 X026 M js T T T O Im IN oO N t t T t t 1S 4S 4S 4S 4S 43 ES 4S p X021 X023 0 X025 V x027 Class D X024 X026 ijji rf N OJO oe SsSsisssisg FX2NC 16EYT Transistor output sink TILOlLTINI OT PoO Oors ININTINININININT AN OIOIOIOIOJOJIOJIJOJO O oj gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt CT C ar 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit a sink source common input type input extension block and a transistor output Source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS input extension block FX2NC 16EX DS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS LO diode is j 12 0 1450V Jo Jo j necessary X021 e X025 Y X027 24V DC X022 X024 X026 n o jle IN om lo Jo N Syst Jt 7st J 7st vt VS VS VS VS 1S 1S FSS X021 VY X023 Y X025V X027 Class D X022 X024 X026 grounding FX2NC 16EYT DSS are a Transistor output Source FX2NC 16EX DS oleam t oao oN NINININI N OIIOIOJIOJ O 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 158 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 UNO 7 6 1 When SEGL instructions are used N This subsection gives exa
143. External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install the product so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 98 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Connect the DC power supply wirin
144. External power supply 85 to 242 V AC Resistance load 0 3 A point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less ndu Q7 7 eames Inductive load Pee g 36 VA 200 V AC Q Min load 0 4 VA 100 V AC 5 l 1 6 VA 200 V AC be Open circuit leakage current HA E 2 mA 200 V AC 6 Response time 2 2 ms or less po O Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation S g O Operation indicator LED lights when photo thyristor power is supplied Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24 V DC P 3 3kQ 24V DC 7mA 7 FA caz Input output circuitry 229 NV D 1 A AY F 9 015 g S CN1 Connector side F LED Photo thyristor External wiring 1 In systems where frequent large load ON OFF switching occurs due to rush currents the root mean square current should be 0 2 A or less lt Example gt 4A T 42 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 9 0 2A 0 02 0 7 10 W 0 02 0 7 10 T Sec Sec Sec lt 2 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC _ Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 197 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 14 FX 16EYS ES TB UL 8 14 2 Internal circuit thyristor O00 to OO7 Lower numbers A A0 to A A7 Higher numbers Surge absorbers are connected to each output m0 1 2 3 004 567 440123 444567 l l l I NV N I NV N I NV N I NV N
145. FX Series terminal blocks product USER S GUIDE Manuals for communication control ECommon Sete ais FX Series Details on N N Network Parallel Link Computer Link V ee User s Manual Data JY997D16901 and Non Protocol communication RS and RS2 09R715 Communication Edition instructions and FX2N 232IF FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U F X3UC 2 Separate Series User s Manual JY997D26201 Details on MODBUS serial communication in FX3s i volume MODBUS Serial FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3uc PLCs Communication Edition ERS 232C RS 422 RS 485 communication When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed and FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition For the MODBUS communication refer to the FX3s FX3G FX3Gc FX3u FX3uc Series User s Manual MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Supplied ar K with FX3U 232ADP MB JY997D26401 Details on handling the RS 232C communication i Installation Manual special adapter product Supplied PE with FX3U 232ADP JY997D13701 Details on handling the RS 232C communication i product Installation Manual special adapter Supplied ae A with FX3U 485ADP MB JY997D26301 Details on handling the RS 485 communication special i product Installation Manual adapter Supplied i nae K with FX3U 485ADP JY997D13801 Details on handling the RS 485 communication special i product Installation Manual adapter 14 FX3GC Series Programm
146. FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points Subsection 1 8 1 Subsection 1 8 2 Subsection 1 8 1 Subsection 1 8 3 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points The number of input output points and maximum number of input output points varies depending on network use Number of Maximum number of Reference Input Output Points input output points When CC Link is not used 128 Subsection 1 8 1 When CC Link is used 128 256 When AnyWireASLINK is used For the number of input output points and maximum number of input output points refer to Section 1 7 1 8 1 Calculation of number of input output points To obtain the total number of input output points count the input output points of input output extension blocks and the input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of remote I O points on CC Link and AnyWireASLINK master network must be excluded Total the number of input output points on the main unit and the number of those on the input output extension blocks To obtain the total number of input output points count the input points X000 and higher and output points YO00 and higher of the main unit and input output extension blocks Count the input output points of the remote I O stations connected to the FX2N 64CL M Add the number of remote I O points to the number of input output p
147. FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 13 FX 16EYS TB 8 13 FX 16EYS TB Connect the FX 16EYS TB to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LIDIEYT FX2N 16EYT C The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 8 13 1 Specifications Item FX 16EYS TB Terminal block M3 5 screw The connection with the PLC is the connector Output type Triac SSR External power supply 85 to 242 V AC Connection form Resistance load 0 3 A point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less mar pan Inductive load EVAO 36 VA 200 V AC Min load 0 4 VA 100 V AC 1 6 VA 200 V AC Open circuit leakage current elc
148. FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3uc Series User s Manual Communication Edition MODBUS Serial Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3uc Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U FX3uUCc Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition Data Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Edition 19 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Major Features 1 Outline 1 1 Major Features 1 Basic functions 2 Input output high speed processing Up to 256 input output points functions of main unit The total number of inputs and outputs 128 High speed counter function points maximum directly connected to the PLC Input terminals of main unit and remote inputs and outputs 128 points Input of llector t ist tput maximum of the CC Link etc can be extended A eas naan is as to 256 points 1 phase 60 kHz x 4 points 10 kHz x 2 points Refer to 1 8 Number of I O Points and 2 phase 30 kHz x 2 points 5 kHz x 1 points Maximum Number of I O Points Refer to 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring in this manual Program memory and Programming Manual The PLC has a 32 K step EEPROM memory Pulse catch function Operation instructions Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be Various instructions such as floating point and captured without a complicated program
149. FX3uc 1PS 5V FX3UC 1PS 5V Connection when the built in power supply is insufficient FX3UC FX2NC Series extension FX2NC I O FX3UC Special function FX2NC Special function FX2NC I O FX3UC Special function FX2NC Special function Range to be covered by main unit Range to be covered by FX3UC 1PS 5V 33 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoneaoadg SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A ndu Q7 SUO eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Jo Bulli jo sejdwexy i s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuluua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 7 Rules of System Configuration 1 7 Rules of System Configuration The system configuration must meet the following three requirements 1 Number of input output points The total number of input and output points should be 256 or less in the whole system For details refer to 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points Number of input output points for whole system Up to 256 points 0 1 Number of input output points including input output occupied points Up to 128 points a e CC Link master e AnyWireASLINK master Input output Input output CC Link LT Special adapter Main unit tension block extension block master CC Link LT Remote I O station Remote I O station Remot
150. ISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION wou e Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device 199 When disposing of batteries separate them from other waste according to local regulations 203 For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries refer to Appendix G 6 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION sctrone When transporting the FX3GC Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in Section 3 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations For details of the regulated products refer to Appendix F FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual revision 4 2015 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3G
151. L Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 6 2 2 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 6 2 4 Minimum load 5 V DC 2 mA reference values Open circuit leakage current OFF ON Approx 10 ms ON gt OFF Approx 10 ms Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Response time Output operation display Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel Load O sed lt m m O lt CI mm Q9 YU UU ale CI C Ca A NRO O O S Fuse External power supply Load Output circuit diagram C4 Cd Cd Co Co Co Co Co Oyo Te O_o _ COM2 Fuse External PLC power supply 138 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 2 Product life of relay contacts UNO The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life N 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller 2 3 the arc energy gets
152. LC 2 RS 422 RS 232C communication The FX3Gc PLC can write and read programs and perform monitoring at 115 2 kbps through RS 422 RS 232C communication 1 115 2 kbps supported programming tools 2 GX Works2 Ver 1 08J or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later 2 115 2 kbps supported interfaces Standard built in port RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H is connected Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C 3 In programming tools not supporting 115 2 kbps Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps 2 Select FX3G when using a programming tool that does not support the FX3Gc PLC Appendix A 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of special adapter When connecting peripheral equipment programming tool or GOT CPU direct connection by way of the FX3U 232ADP MB set the connection channel CH1 or CH2 as follows If the connection channel is not specified with the status below communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment For details refer to the Data Communication Edition Set to KO the special data register for communication format setting of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment CH1 D8400 or D8120 CH2 D8420 Set the communication parameter PLC system 2 of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to Not set as shown in the window below FX Parameter Memory Capacity PLC Nam
153. LC resistance load is 1 6 A or less 132 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 4 Output Derating Curve UNO When extension blocks are connected the derating curve below shows the simultaneous ON ratio of all available PLC outputs with respect to the ambient temperature Use the PLC within the simultaneous output ON ratio range shown in the figure Derating curve simultaneous ON ratio Supply voltage 24V DC N SUOISUBWUIG lobe applicable gueuey GO ep P 25 C 40 C 55 C Ambient temperature a 6 1 5 Handling of transistor output 1 Output terminals ge 4 8 16 or 32 transistor output points are covered by one common terminal i T DS Sink output Two COML terminals connected each other inside the PLC are provided for sink outputs in the main unit transistor output type extension blocks for FX2NC and FX2N 16EYT C For external wiring connect two COMU terminals outside the PLC so that the load applied on each COMU terminal becomes smaller Sink output type ndu OW ep O D Q QO A lt O 5 7 Source output Two VL terminals connected to each other inside the PLC are provided for sink outputs in the main unit transistor output type extension blocks source type for the FX2Nc For external wiring connect two VL terminals outside the 7 PLC so th
154. Low 1 5 V DC or less voltage OFF High 3 5 V DC or more Input response OFF ON High gt Low 1ms 1 ms 0 5ms time ON OFF Low gt High 1 ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Input signal type TTL input Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Input operation display Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp Photocoupler Input circuit diagram 5 3 2 Handling of 5 V DC Input 1 Input terminals When an input terminal and the 5 terminal are connected with the 5 V DC circuit shown in the Photocoupler figure on the right the input turns ON At this time the input indicator LED turns ON Multiple 5 terminals are connected inside the PLC 2 2kQ i f Det Input impedance Input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler Response delay of Input impedance approximately 1ms is given for a change in the input FXON 1GEXL C ON OFF or OFF ON Input sensitivity The table below shows the input current and input sensitivity in this PLC Item Specifications Input signal voltage 5VDC 5 Input signal current Max 40 mA 5 V DC a ON Low 1 mA or more Input sensitivity current OFF High 0 4 mA or less o ON Low 1 5 V DC or less Input sensitivity voltage OFF High 3 5 V DC or more 110 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 5 V DC Input FX2
155. M 8066 M 8067 M 8068 M 8069 Operation and function If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is ON the interrupt will not operate For example turning M8050 ON disables the IOO interrupt hence the interrupt routine is not processed even in an allowable program area If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is OFF a The interrupt will be accepted b The interrupt routine will be processed promptly if it is permitted by the El FNC 04 instruction However if the DI FNC 05 instruction disables interrupts the interrupt program will not be processed until El FNC 04 permits the interrupts I O configuration error PLC hardware error Serial communication error ch0 Serial communication error 1 ch1 Parameter error Operation error Operation error latch I O bus check 5 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON A i Correspond OG ing special 3 S device o OU O DO E 3 O F SD Sy 33 WN _ A 5 E ge 30 On Qao 0 O o gt 5 2 EPEE Oo s 2gs BSE O D8060 o 5 fo n D8061 Gane D8062 G D8063 3gz 30 a D8064 aS TNO D8065 52 D8069 oo D8314 D8315 D8066 D8069 D8314 D8315 D8067 D8069 D8314 D8315 D8068 D8312 D8313 6 Seria
156. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FX3GC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition Main Unit FX3GC 32MT D FX3GC 32MT DSS Input Output Extension Block FX2NC 16ELJ L FX2NC 32EL L FX2N 8EL L FX2N 16EL L GEE S2fcty Precautions uD Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories and A CAUTION WARN l NG Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight CAU T O N personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WARNING ae e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the followin
157. N 16EXL C 5 3 3 Example of external wiring UNO Use shielded wires for wiring the 5 V DC FX3GC 32MT D DC DC convener ee ea Handle the power supply Power connector Cc 0p 49 N i e i om circuit correctly in 3 5 24V DC accordance with Chapter oS 4 Power supply g2 i specifications and D l See eee eee ee external wiring gueuey GO g Three 8 wire D sensor aj FX2Nc extension block Dedicated to sink input types only For an input device having a 4 E parallel resistance or a Yy A 3kO i two wire proximity switch a gs ena tie e By z _I q l 3 5 ERENER Refer to Subsection 5 2 4 ae Phot otocoupler eam OF Input Kee HEH s FE terminal Two wire ee i proximity o S e2 Photocoupler X000 L 2 2kKQ Input impedance lt ndno OD E 1 sy Oo lt J O suoneoyioads 1 2 2kQ e TTL y Input impedance ma SEM External unit 23 3 2 ose FX2N 16EXL C D O 1 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc 8 2 Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 3 3 Use a fuse suitable for the system o WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 111 FX3GC
158. ND or WDT instruction execution T Eeri 1 40 F X3GC Series e 2 2K steps e 4 4K steps e 8 8K steps e If 16K steps or more K8 is written to D8002 and 16 or 32 is written to D8102 Stores the memory type 10H Built in memory in PLC 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON I felol in units of 0 1V Battery voltage present value Example 3 0V Default 2 7 V in units of 0 1 V Writes from system ROM at power ON Not used Correspond ing special device D8101 M8002 D8102 M8004 M8005 M8006 Correspond Number and Content of register ing special name device Clock D 8010 Accumulated instruction execution Present scan time from 0 step time in units of 0 1ms D 8011 iini deci Minin nmiscan inimum value of scan time i SOSE in units of 0 1ms time D 8012 Maxi f i Maxmungean Maximum value of scan time i SODE in units of 0 1ms time D 8013 0 to 59 seconds i Second data for real time clock D 8014 0 to 59 minutes i Minute data for real time clock D 8015 0 to 23 hours i Hour data for real time clock D 8016 1 to 31 days i Day data for real time clock D 8017 1 to 12 months i Month data for real time clock D 8018 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 i Year data for real time clock ee O Sunday to 6 Saturday Day of the week for real time clock data 1 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039
159. O D SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 gueuey Q suoneaoadg SUOI EOIJIO8dS A ddng Jamog A ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS 104 Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj sguLeu zuUleN uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work Users Manual Hardware Edition 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off
160. OQ SUOI eOIIOedS 3 4 4 Connecting method C Connection of FX2N FX3u extension blocks This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N I O extension blocks or FX2N FX3U special indino WD function blocks 8 1 Connection procedure S 1 Remove the top cover of the existing block left side nA ane 2 Connect the extension cable of the block to be connected gt Added units F right side to the existing block extension cable lt lt m right side LF 3 Fit the top cover eas a Existing units SER left side D 9 NSN SSS N 8 PLES DN a 3 D v 9 Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny S L 79 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension equipment 3 4 5 Connecting method D Extension cable FX2N CNV BC connecting This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N CNV BC to the extension cable of the extension block 1 Connection procedure 1 Separate the case of FX2N CNV BC into two pairs as shown right To separate the case use a precision flathead screwdriver Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A shown in the right figure and the hook will come off 4 places 2 Connect the extension cable on the upstream side 2 in the right figure 3 Connect the e
161. PP Pops recalls and removes the currently stored result INV Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations MEP Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse MEF Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse Appendix D 2 Step Ladder Instructions Mnemonic Function Out Instruction OUT Final logical operation type coil drive SET SET Bit device latch ON RST RESET Bit device OFF PLS Rising edge pulse PLF Falling trailing edge pulse Master Control Instruction MC Denotes the start of a master control block MCR Other Instruction NOP End Instruction END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 Denotes the end of a master control block No operation or null step Mnemonic STL RET Function Starts step ladder Completes step ladder FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers D Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition D 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix D 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Mnemonic Function FNC No Mnemonic Function Program Flow Data Operation 00 Conditional Jump 40 Zone Reset 01 Call Subroutine 41 Decode 02 Subroutine Return 42 Encode 03 Interrupt Return 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 04 Enable Interrupt 44 Check Specified Bit Status 05 D Disable Interrupt 45 Mean 06 Main Routine Program End 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refres
162. RUN LED Status Monitoring j POWER PLC Information Remote STOP lt gt T h e L E D statu S o Memory Type Ram Clear PLC Memory ERROR of FX PLC is ALARM CPU Version 40 Set Clock displayed je Stop Monitor Close 212 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 1 10 6 2 Representation of errors o D Errors are represented in this manual and GX Works2 as shown in the following table This manual GX Works2 I O configuration error I O Configuration Error PLC hardware error PLC Hardware Error 2 PLC PP communication error PLC PP Communication Error om Serial communication error 1 ch1 Link Error 3 2 Serial communication error 2 ch2 Serial Communication Error 2 ch2 5 Parameter error Parameter Error Syntax error Syntax Error Circuit error Ladder Error 3 Operation error Operation Error ae Special block error Special Block Error 2S Special parameter error Special Parameter Error aj o z 4 gy 8 5 BS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui Jo sojdwexg s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO 9 g 5 213 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes
163. Remark IEC1010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical The equipment has been assessed as a component for A1 1992 equipment for measurement fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements control and laboratory use of IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 1992 General requirements BSEN61010 1 1993 1 Compliance to BSEN61010 1 is claimed through virtue of direct compliance to IEC1010 1 and Amendment 1 Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 FX2N 16EYR ES UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL from September 1st 2010 FX2N 8EYR S ES UL For the products above PLCs manufactured before March 31st 2002 are compliant with IEC1010 1 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2007 Standard Remark IEC1010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical The equipment has been assessed as a component for A1 1992 equipment for measurement control fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements and laboratory use of IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 1992 General requirements EN61131 2 1994 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for A11 1996 Equipment requirements and tests fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements A12 2000 of EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for
164. S CAU TIO N gy e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices as Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions 5 7 Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit oS N lt connector conversion adapter and Battery DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device When disposing of batteries separate them from other waste according to local regulations ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries refer to Appendix G TRANSPORTATION AND C U TI N E STORAGE PRECAUTIONS A O EE 3S O e When transporting the FX3GC Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life D If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in Section 3 1 T Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC sem After transportation verify the operations of the PLC a 2 When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations D For details of the regulated pro
165. Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring 5 4 AC input FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 5 4 AC input FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 5 4 1 AC input specifications The table below shows the input specifications of the FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Item Input points 8 points Connection type Connector terminal block Input signal voltage Approx 21 kQ 50 Hz Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz 6 2 mA 110 V 60 Hz 4 7 mA 100 V 50 Hz Input response time Approx 25 to 30 ms Input impedance Input signal current Input signal type Voltage contact Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Input operation display AC input specifications 100 to 110 V AC 10 15 50 60 Hz Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp 100 to 120V AC Photocoupler Input circuit diagram 5 4 2 Handling of 100 V AC Input 1 Input terminals When voltage of 100 to 120 V AC is applied between the input terminal and COM terminal the input terminal is turned on The input display LED lights Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input extension blocks with the COM terminal of a DC system 2 Input circuit The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are insulated with a photocoupler Response delay of approximately 25 ms to 30 ms is given for a change in the input ON OFF or OFF gt ON 3 Input sensitivity The input current and input sensitivity of these
166. Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition UNnO 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring N DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 gueueg Q 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off a Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case a Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case 4 gy DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Be 302 N lt e Do not bundle the control l
167. Sink input Transistor output sink indino SUOI EOIJIN9dS 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output transistor output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT DSS Digital switch of BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary Class D grounding D 5S 3 oe Q Q Source input Aayeg O FX36c 32MT DSS Transistor output source _ 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 151 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 2 Main unit Output extension block Example of program Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit and a transistor output sink only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D output extension block FX2NC 16EYT 24V DC Digital switch of BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary FX2Nc 16EYT Transistor output sink 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit and a transistor output source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS 24V DC Digital switch of i ee CON Class D g
168. Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8517 Number and name PLC Mode M 8030 Battery LED OFF M 8031 1 Non latch memory all clear M 8032 1 Latch memory all clear M 8033 Memory hold STOP M 8034 1 All outputs disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN signal M 8037 Forced STOP signal M 8038 Parameter setting M 8039 Constant scan mode Operation and function When M8030 set to ON LED on PLC is not lit even if low battery voltage is detected If this special auxiliary relay is activated the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and present values of T C D special data registers and R are cleared to zero However file registers D in program memory and extension file registers ER are not cleared When PLC is switched from RUN to STOP image memory and data memory are retained All external output contacts of PLC are turned OFF Refer to Programming Manual for details Communication parameter setting flag for N N network setting When M8039 is ON PLC waits until scan time specified in D8039 and then executes cyclic operation 4 Executed at END instruction Step Ladder and Annunciator M 8040 Transfer disable M 8041 2 Transfer start M 8042 Start pulse M 8043 2 Zero return complete M 8044 2 Zero point condition M 8045 All output reset disable M 8046 3 STL state ON M 80473 S
169. TL monitoring enable M 8048 3 Annunciator operate M 80492 Annunciator enable While M8040 is turned ON transfer between states is disabled Transfer from initial state is enabled in automatic operation mode Pulse output is given in response to a start input Set this in the last state of zero return mode Set this when machine zero return is detected Disables the all output reset function when the operation mode is changed ON when M8047 is ON and either of SO to S899 or S1000 to S4095 is active D8040 to D8047 are enabled when M8047 is ON ON when M8049 is ON and either of S900 to S999 is ON D8049 is enabled when M8049 is ON T2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Executed at END instruction Correspond ing special device D8176 to D8180 D8039 M8047 D8040 to D8047 D8049 M8048 Number and name Interrupt Disable M 8050 Input interrupt 1000 disable M 8051 Input interrupt 1100 disable M 8052 Input interrupt 1200 disable M 8053 Input interrupt 1300 disable M 8054 Input interrupt 1400 disable M 8055 Input interrupt 1500 disable M 8056 Timer interrupt 6X0 disable M 8057 Timer interrupt 17200 disable M 8058 Timer interrupt BOO disable M 8059 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Error Detection M 8060 M 8061 M 8062 M 8063 M 8064 M 8065
170. UC or FX2NC Series extension equipment BX i or A connect them first and then 8 connect the FX2NC CNV IF BA FX2Nnc I O FX2NC CNV IF FX2N I O FX3UC special function FX3U FX2N special function FX2NC special function a Aeyeg O _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 39 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 10 Restriction in number of units in each group 1 10 Restriction in number of units in each group Confirm the number of units using the following procedures Division Contents of restrictions Analog Up to two units can be connected Up to two units can be connected Note that the number of connectable units is restricted for the following communication special adapter Special adapter YA Communication Model name Restriction Only one FX3U ENET ADP unit can be connected to a single PLC FX3U ENET ADP main unit e When the FX3UC 1PS 5V is used Up to 8 special function blocks in total can be connected in each system Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected in the range where the power is supplied from the main unit After the FX2NC CNV IF up to 4 I O extension blocks and special function blocks in total can be connected The number of units connectable to the main unit or extension power supply unit is restricted in the following models as shown on the next page e When the FX3UC 1PS 5V is not used Up to 2 s
171. UIOLU ng ul seveyeq Hi Y000 Clear signal device iii specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN D 8465 FNC156 instructions M8465 Y001 Clear signal device specification 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 247 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 3 Analog special adapters special devices Appendix C 3 Analog special adapters special devices When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column For details refer to Analog Control Edition Appendix C 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 Operation and function Number FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 3A ADP gompalvle From first product From first product From first product Versions E EOL My EEC ETIL M 8280 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8281 Input mode switching Ch2 M 8282 Input mode switching Ch3 M 8283 Input mode switching Ch4 M 8284 Not used M 8285 Not used M 8286 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch3 Output hold mode cancel M 8287 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M 8288 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used M 8289 Sets whether or not output channel is used PA EEUE EG LAEE OET M 8290 Input mode switching Ch1 M 8291 Input mode s
172. Works2 Ver 1 40 SWLIDNC GXW2 E Ver 1 62Q or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 40 Ver 1 08J or later Ver 1 77F or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3GC PLCs Ver 1 40 Ver 2 00A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 5 Ver 5 00A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 GX Developer SWOD5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs earlier than Ver 1 10 Ver 8 78G or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 FX PCS WIN E 2 Ver 3 00 or later Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 1 Write during RUN is not possible with a SFC program 2 Write during RUN is not possible with a list program or a SFC program Cautions on write during RUN Item Caution Program memories which can be written in RUN mode BUNIN EEPROM Number of program steps which can be 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion written for circuit change in RUN mode including NOP immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit Circuit blocks in which labels P and are added deleted or changed in edited circuits Circu
173. XO70 to X077 X100 to X107 Y000 to Y007 Y010 to Y017 Y020 to Y027 YO70 to Y077 Y100 to Y107 Numbers for added input output block For each of the input output extension blocks connected to the right side of the main unit or input output extension block input output numbers following the input output numbers on the main unit or extension block on the left side are assigned respectively However the last digit is assigned from 0 For example when the input number in the main unit or extension block on the left side ends at X043 input numbers starting from X050 are assigned to the extension block on the right side When the FX2N 8ER is used unused numbers are generated in input output numbers X044 to X047 Unused numbers X000 to X017 X020 to X037 1X040 to X043 X050 to X067 N aaa eS Input extension I O extension Input extension Main unit block FX2NC CNV IF block block FX2NC 16EX FX2N 8ER FX2N 16EX Y0O00 to YO17 Y020 to YO23 Y024 to YO27 Unused numbers 52 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 15 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 1 15 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks When the power is turned on the main unit CPU automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit 2 1 15 1 Rules of unit number assignment lobe Unit numbers are automatically as
174. _ X007 X014 X006 Source input Transistor output source EE The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 156 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 5 Input Matrix MTR FNC 52 2 Main unit Output extension block Example of program Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit and a transistor output sink only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT D output extension block FX2Nc 16EYT 0 1A 50V diode is necessary X001 Y X003 VY X005V X007 x002 X004 X006 O Im IN oO IT IO oO N T T T JT N JT JT JT I ZA A AN AN N AN AN X001 Y X003 Y X005 Y X007 X002 X004 X006 Class D grounding Connect pull up resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs Ololo Slololo X000 to X007 FX2NC 16EYT Transistor output sink lo Ors 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit and a transistor output Source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS 0 1A 50V lO O diode is 2 necessary WV X001 Y X003 Y X005 Y X007 X002 X004 X006 o I IN Joo Jt jo Jo N t t s j 4 M52 M53 N M54 M55 M56 M57 Jt T S 45 S45 45
175. able Controllers Associated Manuals User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual Model WEthernet CC Link CC Link LT AnyWireASLINK When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Details on handling the FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication special adapter Supplied A wi oe ee JY997D47401 product Installation Manual When using refer also to the FX3U ENET ADP User s Manual Separate PAUE NEAR JY997D45801 Details on the FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication 09R725 volume User s Manual special adapter Details on handling the CC Link master special function block When using refer also to the FX3U 16CCL M User s Manual sepalale Bi aan JY992D43601 Details on the CC Link master special function block 09R724 volume User s Manual Details on handling the CC Link master special function block When using refer also to the FX2N 16CCL M User s Manual S Supplied A Wie Wee JY992D43401 Installation Manual product S Supplied A aan Wee eee JY992D93201 Hardware Manual product Zi Pate ee JY 992D93101 Details on the CC Link master special function block 09R710 volume __ User s Manual Supplied Details on handling the CC Link intelligent device K at FX3U 64CCL JY997D29801 station special function block i Installation Manual When using refer also to the FX3U 64CCL User s product Manual r Separate PAOU DAGS JY997D30401 Details on
176. al can be connected after the FX2NC CNV IF There is no problem since the components are not changed OK indino c Other restrictions There is no problem since the components are not changed OK SUOI EOIJINedS ssf The restrictions for the number of input output points the restriction for the 5 V DC power supply E capacity which is within the maximum number of connectable units and the configuration is ER o valid when an extension power supply unit is added 7 D Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj sguLeu zuUleN uny SOL 51 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 14 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 1 14 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y When input output extension blocks are connected to the main unit CPU octal numbers are assigned as input output numbers X Y when the power is turned ON Accordingly it is not usually necessary to specify input output numbers using parameters It is necessary however to assign input output numbers to the following special function blocks e FX2N 64CL M 1 14 1 Rules for input output number X Y assignment When the power is turned on input output numbers X Y are assigned in accordance with the following rules 1 Input output numbers X Y are octal Octal numbers are assigned as input output numbers X Y as shown below X000 to X007 X010 to X017 X020 to X027
177. ammable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 3 2 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Examples of program 1 For C251 X011 e While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input RST terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption K1234 e While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST instruction is executed X012 When the current value exceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 M8251 turns off 003 Y003 turns on down count or off up count according to the A phase input B phase input counting direction Main unit 2 For C254 X011 25nn panke e C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal A RST C254 X006 is turned on while X012 is on A nasteme ease anes The count input terminals are X000 A phase and X001 X012 C254 DO D1 B phase D e C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset C254 l i D The setting is D1 DO immediately when X002 is turned on e When the current value exceeds the setting D1 DO M8254 Y004 operates and when the current value becomes lower than the setting Y004 tu
178. ammable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Rotary Encoder High speed Counters C235 to C255 7 2 2 2 phase 2 input C251 to C255 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams For input allocation in high speed counters refer to Subsection 5 5 2 Caution As connecting cables use shielded twisted pair cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder 1 FX3Gc 32MT D Rotary encoder 2 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder FX3GC 32MT DSS Source input wiring Rotary encoder 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 149 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 gueuey Q suoneaoadg A ddng 12mod A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI EOIJIN9dS D 5 v Ww O Q S Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj soueLeu zuleN uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Input Interruption With Delay Function Pulse Catch 7 3 Input Interruption With Delay Function Pulse Catch This section shows wiring examples for input interruption 1000 or 1001 using X000 When using another input inte
179. ant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 137 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 1 Relay output specifications Item Relay output specification FX2NC 16EYR T DS 16 points FX2N 8ER ES UL 4 points Number of output points FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL 16 points FX2NC 16EYR T DS FX2N 8ER ES UL Connecting type FX2N 8EYR ES UL Terminal block FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Output type Relay output 30 V DC or less or 240 V AC or less 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards When using one COMU terminal make sure that the total load current of 8 resistance load points is 4 A or less FX2NC 16EYR T DS 2 A 1 point When connecting two COMU terminals outside the PLC make sure that the total load current of 8 resistance load points is 8A 8 points External power supply Resistance or less load FX2N 8ER ES UL The total resistance load current per common should be as FX2N 8EYR ES UL follows Maxload FX2N 8EYR S ES UL Sou poimi 4 output points common 8A or less FX2N 16EYR ES UL 8 output points common 8A or less FX2NC 16EYR T DS FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL 80 VA FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES U
180. anual When using refer also to the FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3U p FX3uc Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied e with ees JY992D65901 Details on handling the 4 ch analog output special i User s Guide function block product Supplied E with TANCADA JY997D07601 Details on handling the 4 ch analog output special i product User s Manual function block Details on handling the 4 ch analog output special Supplied A with FX3U 4DA ADP JY997D14001 adapter R product User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3S FX3G F X3GC F X3U 16 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Associated Manuals User s Manual Hardware Edition Manual Model Analog input output mixed When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied with Peover JY997D11401 Details on handling the 4 ch analog input and 1 ch 09R616 product User s Manual analog output special function block Supplied Details on handling the 2 ch analog input and 1 ch e FX3U 3A ADP JY997D35601 analog output special adapter When using refer also to User s Manual FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U F X3uUC Series User s Manual product Analog Control Edition Manuals for positioning control ECommon FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual JY997D16801 Positioning Control Edition Manuals for FX 30P Separate vol
181. any FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition Standards Type Models from June 1st 2005 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC EX Where x x indicates 16 32 FX2NC 16EX T FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3GC 32MT D FX3U ENET ADP from April 1st 2007 from October 1st 2007 from December 1st 2007 from June 1st 2009 from January 1st 2012 from February 1st 2012 Standard EN61131 2 2007 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests Models from March 1st 1999 FX2NC EX DS Where indicates 16 32 FX2NC 16EX T DS FX2NC EX Where x x indicates 16 32 FX2NC 16EX T from August 1st 1999 from October 1st 2007 Standard EN61000 6 4 2007 Generic emission standard Industrial environment EN50081 2 1993 Electromagnetic compatibility EN61000 6 2 2005 Generic immunity standard Industrial environment FX2NC KEYT Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment MELSEC FX3Gc FX3uU c FX2Nc series manufactured FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX2NC EX DS FX2NC x EYT DSS FX2NC 16EX T DS FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3GC 32MT DSS Remark Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EMI e Radiated Emission e Conducted Emission EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst e Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptio
182. ar Example 2009 Year Example 2010 Last digit of year Last two digit of year 9 7 Battery Related Precautions 1 The FX3Gc Series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2N F2 40BL and FX2NC FX2NC 32BL Series e Not for use with the FX3GC Series 2 Make sure to select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery 202 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition UNnO 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally N SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 su ousg Q Failure to do so may cause electric shock D Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual 2 Use the battery only for the specified purpose aj Connect the battery correctly S Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive a forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight 4 Do not expose to water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incor
183. aster block Abbreviation of FX3U 64CCL interface block Abbreviation of FX2N 32CCL interface block FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Users Manual Hardware Edition Generic Name and Abbreviation 2escnption Remote I O stations Remote stations that handle information in bit units only AnyWireASLINK master Abbreviation of model FX3U 128ASL M AnyWireASLINK series master block Peripheral devices Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator programming Sonware Generic name for the following models GX Works2 GX Developer FX PCS WIN GX Works2 Abbreviation of programming software packages SWLIDNC GXW2 J and SWLIDNC GXW2 E GX Developer Abbreviation of programming software packages SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E FX PCS WIN Abbreviation of programming software packages FX PCS WIN and FX PCS WIN E Generic name for the following models Handy programming panels FX 30P FX 20P FX 20P E Indicators GOT1000 Series Generic name for GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 and GT10 GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series Manuals Abbreviation of FX3Gc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3U F X3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition FX3GC Hardware Edition Programming manual Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition MODBUS Serial Abbreviation of
184. at the load applied on each VLJ terminal becomes lt lt m smaller ase css g 8 2 External power supply z For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30 V DC that can output current two or more times i the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit O 3 Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler The common blocks are separated from one another Aayeg 4 Display of operation Operation indicator LEDs are built into the main unit and output extension blocks and turn ON when photocouplers are actuated _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 133 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Transistor Output 5 Response time The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on or off is shown in the following table When using an instruction related to pulse train 5 to 24 V DC oa l l YOOO Y001 5 us or less G omae output or positioning make sure to set the load Main units current to 10 to 100 mA 5 to 24 V DC Extension For FX2NC Series 24 V DC 100 mA 0 2 ms or less blocks For FX2N Series 24 V DC 200 mA 1 The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads For example under a load of 24 V DC 40 mA the response time is approx 0 3 ms When response perf
185. atch Data Positioning Mode Absolute Current Value Read Zero Return Variable Speed Pulse Output Drive to Increment Drive to Absolute RTC Data Compare RTC Data Zone Compare RTC Data Addition RTC Data Subtraction Read RTC data Set RTC data Hour Meter FNC No Mnemonic Function External Device 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 171 Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 17210175 176 Read from Dedicated Analog Block 177 Write to Dedicated Analog Block Data Comparison 220 to 223 224 LDS Load Compare CS1 CSz 225 LD gt Load Compare S1 gt CS2 226 LD lt Load Compare S1 lt CS2 227 228 LD lt gt Load Compare S1 CS2 229 LD lt Load Compare CS1 lt CS2 230 LD gt Load Compare CS1 gt CSz 231 232 AND AND Compare S1 S2 233 AND gt AND Compare S1 gt S2 234 AND lt AND Compare CS1 lt CSz 235 236 AND lt gt AND Compare S11 4CS2 237 AND lt AND Compare S1 lt C 2 238 AND gt AND Compare S1 gt S2 239 240 OR Compare CS1 CS2 241 OR gt OR Compare S D gt CSD 242 OR lt OR Compare CS1 lt CS2 243 244 OR lt gt OR Compare S1 CS2 245 OR lt OR Compare S1 lt S2 246 OR gt OR Compare S1 gt S2 247 to 249 External Device Communication 270 Inverter Status Check 271 Inverter Drive 272 Inverter Parameter Read 273 Inverter Parameter Write 275 Inverter Multi Command 276 MODBUS Read Write Extension File Register Control 290 LO
186. ately stops pulse output e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution e PLSY FNC 50 PWM FNC 58 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN mode again IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 IVMC FNC275 and ADPRW FNC276 instructions e Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse PLF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a cir
187. ation switch Model A3P 3 Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S Oo OS 2 0 1 In the case of input device with built in series diode 9 O O The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4 V or less P For example when lead switches with a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON 4 e Examples of wiring Dedicated to sink input types only LD 83 BL os DS indu e Examples of wiring Common to both sink and source input types SUOI eOIIOedS Sink input wiring Source input wiring indino SUOHeOIJINedS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 105 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 2 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance Rp of 15 kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15 kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb kQ obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure 4Rp Rb kQ lt lt 15 Rp e Examples of wiring Dedicated to sink input types only 24V E l Bleeder Rb resistance e Examples of wiring Common to both sink and source input types Sink in
188. ber of nape of pols number of remote I O stations x32 points 3 Or poini input output points occupies By apapa The number is multiplied by 32 points NO sk aaa MCh eer ees regardless of the number of remote I O 8 System points ais g For details refer to Subsection 1 8 1 o A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of input output points occupied by special 4 B Number of input output points of input output extension function blocks GD blocks E Number of remote I O stations units connected to 8 z C Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M CC Link master 8 1 The number of CC Link points is calculated by the formula 32 points x number of stations even when ss remote I O stations with less than 32 points are used For details refer to the manual of the CC Link master block used When using together with the AnyWireASLINK master make sure that the total number of remote I O points in CC Link and AnyWireASLINK master is 128 or less When CC Link parameters are set by a sequence program all unused remote I O points are occupied and become unavailable When connecting the AnyWireASLINK master behind the CC Link master set CC Link parameters using network parameters For details refer to FX3U 128ASL M User s Manual ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS 2 Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration indino For the main unit input output exte
189. ble speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 8 8 1 Specifications Item FX 16EYR TB Terminal block M3 5 screw Connection form The connection with the PLC is the connector Output type Relay External power supply 250 V AC or less 30 V DC or less ee Resistance load 2 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 2 A or less ax loa Inductive load 80 VA Min load 5 V DC 2 mA Reference value Open circuit leakage current Response time 1 Approx 10 ms Circuit isolation Mechanical isolation Operation indicators LED lights when relay coil power is supplied Power consumption 1 92 W 80 mA 24 V DC Input output circuitry External wiring 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 180 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 8 FX 16EYR TB 8 8 2 Internal circuit O 5 mrono COM1 19 9 COM1 z 2 AA7 18 8 O07 lt AAG 17 7 O06 om AAS 3 e 6 O05 3 23 A z AAO 11 1 O00 I suaus Q 0o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 444 567 a aj z Bog F ge O00 to OO 7 Lower numbers A A0 to A A7 Highe
190. c Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions e This manual provides information for the use of the FX3GcC Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows a Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment b Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These enginee
191. ce or a __2 two wire proximity switch a j bleeder resistance may be IE required p Refer to Subsection 5 2 4 FX2NC extension block Common to both sink and source input types Photocoupler FX3UC 1PS 5V DC DC converter Two wir proximity sensor Power connector FX2N extension block Common to both sink and source input types S S Input terminal YA I ae oo Photocoupler E uw 1 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc 2 Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 3 Use a fuse suitable for the system WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 108 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 3 Examples of source input wiring Common to both sink and source input types UNnO FX3GC 32MT DSS DC DC converter Power connector Fuse f ee ee ae ee Handle the power supply circuit correctly in NO l l 1 24V DC accordance with Chapter l 4 Power supply Fe specifications and Fuse external wiring 33 2a A l Three 1 Wire sensor gueuey GO g 2 FX2NC extension block Common to both sink F 5 or an input device having a Z and source input types parallel
192. ceeeceueceueceueecaeeceeesseesseeesaeesaeesaess 252 Appendix D 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC NUMbeEr aanaannnnnnannaannnn 253 Appendix E Discontinued models 255 Appendix F Precautions for Battery Transportation 257 Appendix F 1 Regulated FX3GC Series products ccccecccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeesaeessaeeeseeeeaes 257 Appendix F 2 Transport guidelines ccccccccssecssccsceceeeceneceeeceusecueeceecseeceueseuessueesaeesaeesnens 257 Appendix G Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States 259 Appendix G 1 Disposal precautions ccccceccssecceeeceeecceecaeeceeeaueeceeceecueceueesseeseeessueseaeeaas 259 Appendix G 2 Exportation preCautions iici naa a a A 259 Appendix G 3 Regulated FX3GC Series Products cccccccccccececeeeceeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseesaees 259 WAV AUT ANN Gy 25s a a ecg tee tad a cee te tate eee nel 261 Revised ISON scii e h e a a 262 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Standards User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Certification of UL cUL standards FX3GC series main units FX3U series special adapters extension power supply unit and FX2N FX2NC series input output extension blocks supporting UL cUL standards are as follows UL cUL file number E95239 Models MELSEC FX3Gc series manufactured FX3GC 32MT D FX3Gc 32MT DSS Models MELSEC FX3u series manufactured FX3U 232ADP MB FX3u
193. character string processing instructions and Refer to 5 Input Specifications and scaling instructions are provided External Wiring in this manual and Programming Manual Built in USB port The PLC has a built in USB port for the Input terminal Signal ON OFF width programming communication function to enable X000 X001 X003 X004 10 us high speed communication at 12Mbps X002 X005 X006 X007 50 us Built in RUN STOP switch Input interruption function The PLC can be started and stopped with the The PLC can process interruption routines with built in switch higher priority using external signals whose RUN and STOP commands can be given to the minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10 us PLC through a general purpose input terminal or X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50 us X002 peripheral device and X005 The timer interruption function is also provided Writing during RUN Refer to 5 Input Specifications and The programming software for personal External Wiring in this manual and computer enables you to modify the program Programming Manual while the PLC is running Pulse width period measurement function Built in clock function The width period of pulses from input terminals The PLC has a clock function to control the time X000 X001 X003 and X004 of the main unit can be measured in units of 10 us Refer to 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring in this manual and Programming tool Use a version
194. ction N When the PLC s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 10 2 is om given RUN LED is lit as If any problems are found the ERR LED flashes or lights Ss 10 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Ineffective gueuey GO SUOI EOIJIN9dS In stopped status 4 1 Item Devices used in program Forcible ON OFF Devices not in use Change of current values of timers counters data registers Devices used in program AF extension registers and file registers Devices not in use A ddng 12mod A Change of current values of extension file registers ee suolediyioads Change of settings of timers and counters 1 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters C data registers D index registers Z and V and extension registers
195. cuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for rising Instruction for while write during RUN is executed edge pulse falling edge pulse OFF Not executed Not executed ON Executed Not executed uonepodsue Aseyeq 10 suonnesalg TI 1 The PLS instruction is not executed Writing in RUN mode to circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following operation MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON MEF instruction Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state
196. d follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Donot connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 99 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey GO suolyeoljioeds A ddng Jamog A ep O D Q Q a O 5 7 indu SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOHeOIJINedS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny S L FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition
197. d type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life N 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller 2 3 the arc energy gets larger a The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 35 VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life 0 35 A 100 V AC 35 VA 3 000 000 times 0 17 A 200 V AC 0 8 A 100 V AC 80 VA 1 000 000 times 0 4 A 200 V AC 1 2 A 100 V AC 120 VA 200 000 times 0 6 A 200 V AC The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down suaus Q suoleoljioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS For precautions on using inductive loads refer to Subsection 8 8 4 2 ndu QT Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make z sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 2 Lamp l
198. ducts refer to Appendix F T ae N h The battery is not incorporated in the PLC main unit at shipment from the factory Order it if necessary 8 D 3 v Ww S 2 10 Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 199 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Battery Purpose 9 1 Battery Purpose 1 Battery Purpose The battery backs up the following contents against power interruption Proper parameter setting is required to back up the device memory and current time For the parameter setting method refer to Subsection 9 3 2 Item Data Retained By Backup Battery Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679 state S1000 to S4095 data register D1100 to D7999 Device memory extended register RO to R23999 Current time Current time clock 1 The data is backed up by the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC at shipment from the factory For backup by the capacitor refer to Appendix B 2 Battery Handling When the battery voltage is low a ALM LED lights red while the power is ON and M8005 and M8006 are switches ON If the battery is not installed exact voltage can not be detected while operating in battery mode Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the ALM LED switches ON a replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible For the replacement method refer to Subsection 9 3 1 9 2 Spec
199. e PLC System 1 PLC System 2 Positioning Ethernet Port CH1 be The setting contents are cleared when unchecked geoi TE hen communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc Communication Wag 5120 special register of PLC must be 0 cleared and must be unchecked sting r Leave this unchecked Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 225 UONELWUOJU UOISJO BOURWOJIOd W SUOI EOIJIN9dS 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o seoinaq jeloeds m sj pow penuljucosiq uolewodsue Aseyeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s Jequiew ng ul s n yeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 2 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN Programming tools supporting write during RUN When using a programming tool that does not support the FX3Gc PLC write during RUN is enabled only for the range of functionality available in the PLC selected as the alternative model For operating procedure and cautions on write during RUN refer to the following manuals Refer to the manual of the programming tool used Refer to the manual of the PLC selected as the alternative model Programming tool Version Remarks Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX3G PLCs earlier than GX
200. e I O station 2 Number of remote I O points on CC Link and AnyWireASLINK Up to 128 points I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I l CC Link and AnyWireASLINK system Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station ee ee e 2 5 V DC power supply capacity current consumption The main unit built in power supply and the extension power supply unit supply power to extension equipment respectively The current consumption varies depending on the type of extension equipment l l Extension Special Special i l Extension Extension Extension Extension ews PREO Paa Range of devices powered Range of devices powered Range of devices powered from main unit from main unit from extension power supply unit For details refer to 1 9 Calculation of 5 V DC power supply capacity current consumption 3 Restriction in number of units for each group For special adapters input output extension blocks and special function blocks the number of units that can be connected to the main unit is restricted For details refer to 1 10 Restriction in number of units in each group Special Special Input output Extension Special Special adapter adapter Main unit extension power supply function function analog communication block unit block block Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 8 units 34
201. e power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 3 g Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product oD e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or S wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WG WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION FS SS Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual e n If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 4 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Bs When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits 2 0 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions 4 ea Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions ss Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws us
202. e pressing the main unit onto the DIN rail lock the DIN rail mounting hooks as shown in the figure below B 76 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 2 FX2N Series I O extension block FX2N FX3uU Series special function block UNO 1 Push the DIN rail mounting hooks as shown in 1 in the figure on the right This step is not required for FX2N Series 8 point type I O extension blocks except for the FX2N 8EYR S ES UL and FX2N FX3u Series special function blocks Rear panel N lobe D 5 o O 5 D 2 Align the upper side of the DIN rail mounting groove with the DIN rail 2 in the figure on the right 3 Press the product onto the DIN rail as shown in 3 in the figure on the right suoneaoadg OEIL 4 The extension cable is connected For the connection method of the extension cable refer to Section 3 4 3 3 2 Procedures for removal from DIN rail 4 1 Disconnect connection cables such as power cables I O cables and e extension cables SS N lt 2 Hook a slotted screwdriver to the DIN rail mounting hook 1 in the figure on the right 3 Move the slotted screwdriver in the direction 2 pull out the DIN rail mounting hooks from all connected units blocks and let the DIN rail mounting hooks come off the DIN rail ndu QI 4 Remo
203. e right Interlock Forward limit Forward Reverse Reverse limit PLC output element PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 196 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 14 FX 16EYS ES TB UL 8 14 FX 16EYS ES TB UL UNO Connect the FX 16EYS ES TB UL to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector N Connectable models FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIDEYT DSS The applications shown below are not supported SUOISUBWUIG lobe Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction suaus Q drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction 3 Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction je Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction a wn 8 14 1 Specifications 4 OU Item FX 16EYS ES TB UL 8 e 0 Terminal block M3 5 screw So FonnectHon form The connection with the PLC is the connector Ss Output type Triac SSR po
204. ed temperature Ch4 la Sg D 8284 Number of averaging times for Ch1 Number of averaging times for Ch1 Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8285 Number of averaging times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8286 Number of averaging times for Ch3 Number of averaging times for Ch3 Number of averaging times for Ch3 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8287 Number of averaging times for Ch4 Number of averaging times for Ch4 Number of averaging times for Ch4 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8288 Error status status Error status status Error status D 8289 Model code K20 ee K21 PTW os code K11 2nd analog special adapter D 8290 Measured temperature Ch1 0 820 Measured temperature Cha D 8292 Measured temperature Cha D8293 Measured temperature Cha D 8294 Number of averaging times for Ch1 Number of averaging times for Ch141 Number of averaging times for Ch1 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8295 Number of averaging times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Ch2 Number of averaging times for Ch2 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds m D 8296 Number of averaging times for Ch3 Number of averaging times for Ch3 Number of averaging times for Ch3 3 z 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 2o D 8297 Number of averaging times for Ch4 Number of averaging time
205. eeeeeeeseaees 50 1 14 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y ccccccssseccceeseeeceeseecceseecseseecseaeeesseueeesseaseessaaes 52 1 14 1 Rules for input output number X Y ASSIGNMENL ccceecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeesaaaeeeeseaaeees 52 1 15 Unit Numbers of Special Function BIOCKS cc cc cccccceececseeeeceeeesseeeeceeeesseeeeseueessaeeeseeessaeeesaass 53 1 15 1 Rules of unit number assignment ccccceeceeeeeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeceaeeeeeesseeeeeeeseneeessaeeeeessanseeeeeeesanes 53 115 2 Exampie or ASSIGNING tke ees ee ee ee 53 1 15 3 Application of Unit number labelS 0 cece ccc eeceeceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeceeceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeseeessaaess 53 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 54 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation ACCESSOTIES ccccceceeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeesaaes 54 Zit MAN Cl MES ecectretee tect ot e a E E dooce suaaktea Mere a Sen tcucacten paces sete pacnaees 54 2 1 2 FX2NC series input output extension block ccccceccccssececceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaes 54 2 1 3 FX2N series input output extension DIOCK cccccceecccceeeeecceeeeeeaeeceeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeseeseeeessaeeeesaes 55 2 1 4 FX2N FX2NC FX3U FX3UC series Special function DIOCK c cc cecccceeceeceeceeceeceeceeeeece
206. eeeeseeeeesaaes 56 ZNO SDC ClAl AG ADICTS osniaoes Sicse sate a E E nde use Ae ees eee teehee 60 ZAG POWEE SUD ORCI resisae ys doc eas seat a a a a Ei 61 2 1 7 Connector conversion adapter si cncee creo a ieee ees eee a 62 2 2 Terminal Layone ena saasancasuanensasangen eae AER N 63 22 AMAN NS T E r O A E 63 2 2 2 FX2NC Series input output extension DIOCK ccccccccssececeececeeeceeceeeeceeeeeseeeesseeeeesaeeeessaeeessnsees 64 2 2 3 FX2N Series input output Extension DIOCK ccccccceccccseecccceeceeaeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseueceeseeeeeseeeensnes 67 22 A Special AGA ICIS sore sis eee ee ee eee ec 70 229 FOWO SUPP UN ts ic seccoth eae Se veces vi teenie wl exw ence fel Sconce tag Goes cede oa e scales Moved srk deena ts chek at 71 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work 72 Oe Generi SPCC Ae ONS essesi a 14 32 MNS FANATION locato meeen a a a 15 3 3 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeesaees 76 3 3 1 Procedures for installing to and removing from DIN rail ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeens 76 3 3 2 Procedures for removal from DIN Fall ccccccccceececeeeececeeeeessecesseeeeesseeeessueeesseeseessueeessaeeeeesaaes 77 3 3 3 Direct mounting FX2N FX3U extension DIOCKS ccccecseecceceseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeseeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeneeeeeaas 77 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension EQUIPMENL
207. eesaeeeeseaeseeeeeessaaeeees 142 63 WhiactSoR OuUlpul EX 2N 1G EY S neien e E T E RTE IOT TETEE 143 623 1 SPC CIICAMOMS aaae e a aa E E 143 03A Handing Or tia OUMU Eessaare E R E EAT 143 6 3 3 External wiring precautions cy rerccsvecaensace clea thtindunshotnaserinudcauetapeulactedersadaeeiies ehcadentet eetagoctaebanuaded eae 144 6 5 4 Example OFexte ial WINING eiia i ates vis Sepa a 6 lakes te eeud a aa Aa eee 145 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 146 7 1 Notes about Examples Of WINO rsispa a a A E E AEE aaia 147 7 2 Rotary Encoder High speed Counters C235 to C255 cece ccecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeeeeees 148 T2 Asphase tmnput C235 108 24 Otek iceaazsedetct a A e r Ea aa i ne eiie eNO nA NEART 148 732 2 2 phase Z IMDut C251 MO C259 re a e R a 149 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 7 3 Input Interruption With Delay Function Pulse Catch ccc cecccceeccceeececeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeeesanees 150 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 00 0 cccccceecccceeceseeeeeeeceeseeeeseecesseeeeseeesseeeesaaees 151 TAA When DSW instructions are USCC cernir S chives hice a E cee ei eas 151 7 4 2 When BIN instructions are used ccc ccc cecccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeesaeeesaeeesaeeeaaeessaseesaes 154 7 5 Input Matrix MTR FNC 52 cc cecccccccccesececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeceseeeeesueeesseeeesuee
208. efresh Error M 8109 Output refresh error D8109 M 8110 to M 8119 Not used Number and Correspond ane Operation and function ing special device RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 18120 9 RS FNC 80 instruction i UME Ne Send wait flag RS FNC 80 instruction 2 NAS Send request ORITA RS FNC 80 instruction 2 Mole Receive complete flag eae RS FNC 80 instruction Ite Carrier detection flag i Mie M 8126 Computer link ch1 Global ON Computer link ch1 MIs Nee On demand send processing M 8128 Computer link ch1 D8127 On demand error flag D8128 Computer link ch1 D8129 On demand Word Byte M 8129 changeover RS FNC 80 instruction Time out check flag 22 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS instruction is OFF Positioning PLSY PLSR instruction M 8145 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8146 Y001 Pulse output stop command Y000 Pulse output monitor i eee BUSY READY Y001 Pulse output monitor lens BUSY READY i Inverter Communication Function 18180 M 8151 Inverter communication in D8151 execution ch1 M 8152 3 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152 M 8153 3 Inverter communication error latch D8153 ch1 M 8154 iMj8155 Not used M 8156 Inverter communication in D8156 execution ch2 M 8157 2 Inverter communication error ch2 D8157 Inverter communication error latch 73 M 8158 ch2 D8158 M15750 3 Cleared when PLC switche
209. end request D8422 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 1 MOSES Receive complete flag pases RS2 FNC 87 ch2 a Carrier detection flag i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 poaa Data set ready DSR flag M 8426 Computer link ch2 Global ON Computer link ch2 Waea On demand send processing Computer link ch2 D8427 DOTES On demand error flag D8428 Computer link ch2 Denes M 8429 On demand Word Byte changeover RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Time out check flag SA Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when RS2 instruction ch2 is OFF MODBUS communication ch1 M 8401 MODBUS request in process M 8402 MODBUS communication error D8402 M 8403 MODBUS communication error D8403 latched M 8404 to M 8407 Not used M 8408 Retry M 8409 Timeout M 8410 Not used MODBUS communication ch2 18421 M18422 D8422 M 8423 Eo communication error D8423 ieaz to meaa Notus OO o 18428 M6428 M6430 i MODBUS communication ch1 ch2 M 8411 MODBUS configuration request flag Number and Correspond eae Operation and function ing special device FX3U ENET ADP ch1 405 IMeAOTToMIBATO Notused FX3U ENET ADP ch2 Tos M18425 l meas IMBAZT o MAO Nouse O see ae 2 Supported in Ver 2 00 or later 3 Used when the SNTP function setting is set to Use in the time setting parameters Error Detection M 8430 to M 8437 M 84384 M 8439 to M 8448 M 8449 M 8450 to M 8459 Positioning M 8460 to M 84
210. er s Guide input special function block FX3UC Series Users Manual Analog Control Edition supp FX2N 4AD TC Details on handling the 4 ch thermocouple input special v with JY992D65501 product User s Guide function block Gancied Details on handling the 4 ch thermocouple input special 5 sr FX3u 4AD TC ADP syoo7p 14801 adapter product User s Manual When using refer also to the FX3S F X3G F X3GC F X3u Supplied FX3U 4LC Details on handling the 4 ch temperature control special A with cial SOR MSUal JY997D38901 function block product When using refer also to the FX3U 4LC User s Manual y Additional TRES JY997D39101 Detail on the 4 ch temperature control special function 09R625 Manual User s Manual block Supplied FXoN 2LC Details on handling the 2 ch temperature control special A with User s Guide JY992D85601 function block product When using refer also to the FX2N 2LC User s Manual r Separate PAN ASE JY992D85801 Details on the 2 ch temperature control special function 09R607 volume User s Manual block Analog output When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied P with Riches JY992D74901 Details on handling the 2 ch analog output special i product User s Guide function block Details on handling the 4 ch analog output special Supplied i A with FX3U 4DA JY997D20801 function block i edugi Installation M
211. er supply 5 V DC 400 mA 1A 1 The 24 V DC power changes the specifications of the voltage range by system configuration For details refer to 4 1 2 The input range of power supply voltage 2 Power consumption changes according to the system configuration For details refer to 4 1 3 Power consumption of the extension equipment 4 1 2 The input range of power supply voltage When connecting special function blocks shown in the table below set the voltage supplied to the main unit as follows 1 When Group A is connected Please use the external power supply of 24 V DC 10 2 When Group B is connected Please use the external power supply of 24 V DC 10 15 3 When either group is not used The external power supply of 24 V DC 20 15 can be used Group Model name Group Model name FX3UC 4AD FX2N 4AD PT FX2NC 4AD FX2N 4AD TC FX2NC 4DA FX2N 4DA FX3U 4AD A FX2N 5A FX3U 4DA FX2N 8AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 32CCL FX2N 2DA B FX2N 2LC FX2N 4AD FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Selection of the external DC power supply to prepare 4 1 3 Power consumption of the extension equipment UNO The power consumption shown on the previous page does not include the power consumption of connected extension blocks When connecting extension blocks shown below add the power consumption shown in the table below t
212. er supply Current Capacity DC FX3UC 1PS 5V 5 V DC extension power supply 24 V DC 5VDC1A 1 Only one FX3UC 1PS 5V unit can be connected in a system 1 4 6 Connector conversion adapter 5 V DC current H Model name Description consumption mA Connector conversion adapter to connect an I O extension block for FX2N or FX2NC CNV IF special function block for FX2N FX3U Connector conversion adapter to connect an I O extension block for FX2N or FX2N CNV BC special function block for FX2N FX3U and the extension cable FXON 30 65EC 1 4 7 Battery Extension cables Classification Description This battery backs up the following data e General devices Parameter setting is required Battery FX3U 32BL M1536 to M7679 1000 to 4095 D1100 to D7999 RO to R23999 e Time on clock FXON 65EC 0 65 m 2 1 These cables are used to mount input output extension blocks for FX2N and Extension cables FXON 30EC 0 3 m 0 11 special function blocks for FX2N FX3U away from the main unit 1 When using an extension cable FXON 30EC or FXON 65EC use only one extension cable per system Make sure to use the FX2N CNV BC when the extension cable is used to connect an extension block This extension cable is not available when the FX3U 4LC or FX2N 8AD is located at the head position Refer to Section 3 4 28 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 4 List
213. erate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller 2 3 the arc energy gets larger a 1 Input output extension blocks For the applicable models refer to Subsection 1 4 2 The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 gueuey GO operations at 20 VA a The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test je at gt Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF P Load capacity Contact life 0 2 A 100 V AC 4 20 VA 3 000 000 times aes 0 1 A 200 V AC gg 0 35 A 100 V AC 8 35 VA 1 000 000 times 8 Y 0 17 A 200 V AC 5S5 0 8 A 100 V AC ae 80 VA 200 000 times 0 4 A 200 V AC 2 FX Series terminal blocks ndu OW For the applicable models refer to Subsection 1 4 8 The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 35 VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test SUOI eOIIOedS Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load capacity Contact life a Q 0 35 A 100 V AC z 35 VA 3 000 000 times Yv 0 17 A 200 V AC S n 0 8 A 100 V AC 80 VA 1 000 000 times 0 4 A 200 V AC 7 1 2 A 100 V AC 120 VA 200 000 times sem 0 6 A 200 V AC 2 25 TE The product l
214. erious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install the product so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 146 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 7 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring 7 1 WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing s
215. erminating AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTB1 16T resistor 16 points input units 16 points output units Remote I O station Remote I O station 2 Judgment of system configuration availability 1 Restriction for the number of input output points Number of input output occupied points a Main unit Number of input output occupied points Total of a FX3GC 32MT D 32 points 32 points b I O extension block Number of input output occupied points Total of b FX2NC 16EX 16 points 16 16 16 16 64 FX2NC 16EYT 16 points FX2NC 16EYR T 16 points FX2NC 16EYR T 16 points 64 points c Connector conversion adapter Number of input output occupied points Total of c ble d Special adapter Number of input output occupied points Total of d e Total number of input output points in remote I O stations Total of e for CC Link LT 4 4 8 points ii f Special function blocks Number of input output occupied points Total of f 8 8 16 FX2N 64CL M Spon A Input output occupied points in remote I O stations are not included in the calculation x here g EE a b c d e f g g Total number of I O points 32 64 0 0 8 16 120 g lt 128 points The I O points restriction is satisfied since the total number of input output points is less than 128 48 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration
216. ernal Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Overview 2 The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications High speed counter input interruption pulse catch pulse width pulse period measurement function nian speed processing speed detection SPD instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction 3 The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 4 The table below shows the drive power supply for each connection destination Connection destination Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX 24 V DC 48 mA FX2N 16EX C 24 V DC 160 mA 166 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2
217. ers Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Appendix C Operation of Special Devices The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and special data registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU In addition do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual Appendix C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Correspond Number and f Operation and function ing special name device PLC Status M 8000 RUN monitor bora NO contact Pe pee Le eee RUN monitor l NC contact M 8002 M8000 Initial pulse NO contact M8001 M 8003 M8002 Initial pulse M8003 s NC contact gt H lt 1 scan time M 8004 ON when either M8060 M8061 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 D8004 Error occurrence is ON M 8005 ON when battery voltage is below D8005 Battery voltage low the value set in D8006 M 8006 It is set when battery voltage low is D8006 Battery error latch detected M 8007 Not used M 8
218. ery User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example 9 4 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status using an indicator lamp etc e M8005 I ___eai Y001 is output when a battery low voltage condition occurs Bat tery low voltage e M8006 Battery low voltage is latched e D8005 Battery voltage can be monitored 9 5 Battery life amp replacement guidelines FX3U 32BL battery life Approx 5 years ambient temperature 25 C 77 F The life of the battery changes with respect to ambient temperature RTT r r When planning for battery replacement please estimate the battery life eee according to the graph to the right and order the replacement batteries in 7 advance 6 D y 5 ab 4 7 3 A 2 o 1 mM 0 O 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient temperature C 9 6 Reading the date of manufacture Reading the optional battery s lot No reference Nameplate Connector X3U 32BL LOT 101 Model name gt F LOT lt Product during December 2009 or earlier gt lt Product from January 2010 gt z 9 Z 4 0 1 Lenita Example Dec pE Example Jan 1 to 9 Jan to Sept 1 to 9 Jan to Sept X Oct Y Nov Z Dec X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Ye
219. etation of Model Names Main Units I O Extension Blocks ccccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 23 AA TASC Or POC UCU onno eas seed hen ce See aeknakee biel oats ata sea A 24 TAT IVAN UNS seco ec nce inca an be alee Licata aa a aa E cee es tae nae ecu 25 WALZ VO Extension BIOCKS score 2 ote est eaae ran Ea a a E e E EEEE 25 1A 3 Special TUNCHION DIOCKS sanien A a S 26 1 4 4 Special AG ALON S costes nas ccc odes de ental ih Sadness cena nese bate a hee dndisceeend Sectinentiex saeeSedsMexcoediaeees 28 14 5 Extensi n power SUDDIY UNM tiaiu2 s es al ees ees aes ei RRA ee eee 28 1 4 6 Connector conversion adapter ccc ccccceeccccesececeeeeeceeeeeececeeceeeeceeeeessaeeeseeeeseueeessaueessaeeesessaaees 28 14 7 Baten Extension Caples cicccb icc o abana esheets cidade ecutoe du neues didea A a 28 14 8 FX Series terminal IOCkS 55 cab conse ene eees asa aa a EERO va EESAN AEE 29 1 4 9 Input output cable Input output connector Power Cable ccccccccceccceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 30 1410 OVS I SUID IY UN so a aa a a ed ie ree cre era ele cen ten Conall 30 Was a POGhAMINAI G OOM 2 2 asteusestunasannsonessadtentans a E Uae aea de dnc tadia a E 30 1 5 Connection to Programming Tool ccccceccecseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesseeeeessaeeeessaeeeesaaneeesaeeeeessaaes 31 1 5 1 The accessing path to the FX38GC from CC LIINK cccccccesececceeeeeeeceeseeeceeeesesseeeeeessseeeessageeees 32 1
220. ews 5 3 Fr OG e Accessories Manual supplied with product a an oS 2o e Connector 10BASE T 100BASE TX 2 D E RJ45 gt e Terminal block External ground terminal M2 5 3 terminal block screw am 1 When the FX3U ENET ADP is connected to 83 the FX3Gc PLC direct screw mounting is not go possible S 81 5 3 21 D 2 1 6 Power supply unit a 1 Extension Power Supply Unit Be Unit mm inches MASS Weight Model name kg Ibs 5 Approx 0 15 FX3UC 1PS 5V 0 331bs 5 e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in j width only e Accessories FX2NC 100MPCB Power supply cable 1 m 3 33 Manual supplied with product SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS 104 Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 61 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 1 7 Connector conversion adapter 1 FX2nc CNV IF Unit mm inches E E MASS Weight g Ibs Approx 60 FX2NC CNV IF 0 14lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width only 14 6 0 58 2 FX2n CNV BC 2 63 2mounting holes Unit mm inches E MASS Weight g Ibs Approx 40 FX2N CNV BC A 0 09lbs e Installation Direct mounting only O 90 60 5 2 39 E F
221. f M8235 to M8245 Count input External reset External start indino input input a O 3 5 Main unit Example of operation T The above counter C235 operates as shown below sen 2 as ob O X010 Up count Down count Up count D ag ee o 9 X011 Reset input z X012 Start input 8 X000 3 Count _ p D input w l 3 i g 3 z C235 9 2 a Current 5 1 1 0 value Y 2 G a a i 9 15 3 3 2 When output has 4 z 4 operated 6 Te 3 C235 output contact NW _ Buooys jqnosj sguLeu zuUleN uny SOL 117 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption by the count input X000 e When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 64 7 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored The current val
222. fferent from the actual operation direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is finished PID operation is not started gt Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto tuning was not executed correctly Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt Check whether the target setting contents are correct lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten in the program lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so t
223. for pulse width period Measurement FUNCTION cccceecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaneesaneeeaness 126 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring 127 OT Transistor Oulputs rcccscrsecactsnrcncatar enc escoceencearnaseapeascacnenaneaaaaeesamssyaaneaaaaassaageeegeeceanar EE 129 6 1 1 Sink and Source Output Transistor cccccceecceccessscecceesecceccesseeeceeesececeueeeessecseeeeseeeeessaaseeres 129 6 1 2 Transistor Output Specifications Sink output type eee cee ces eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 130 6 1 3 Transistor Output Specifications Source output tyPe cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeas 132 O14 Output Derating CUVE se ceca teeta a a 133 6 IoshHanding oniransis Or OU WOU Gace NN eh eae a on oe 133 6 1 6 Extemalwining PRECAUTIONS asror inoran a a Ta e helen 135 6 1 7 Example of external WINO sorts n a ee ese He ee 136 02 Relay OUD a n a a a a Saati uteaecakee tt acs 138 6 2 1 Relay output Specifications cccccccccccccseececeeeceeseeceecseeeecesececeeeceseaeeeeseeeessseessseessesseeeessaeeees 138 6 2 2 Preduct lite of relay COMA iS 12 ei eet ee 139 6 2 3 Handling of relay OUtDUL ceeccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeeeeeseaeeeeesseaeeeessaasseeeeeesaeeees 140 G 2 4 ExtemnalWining precautions asics siuns colder cawer atin a e iaaa a Aa Ena AKOER 141 6 2 5 Example of external wiring ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseceeeeeseeeee
224. g an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case CAUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the 72 control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line 92 Noise may cause malfunctions 98 e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or 127 input output connectors 146 Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 163 GEE S2fty Precautions uD Read these precautions before use 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
225. g applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual 147 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoneoyioads A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino ep ge 49 Q zh O O gt N Jo Bui Jo sejdwex sesp SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Rotary Encoder High speed Counters C235 to C255 7 2 Rotary Encoder High speed Counters C235 to C255 7 2 1 1 phase 1 input C235 to C245 The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used When another high speed counter number is used wire the counter referring to the following diagrams For input allocation in high speed counters refer to Subsection 5 5 2 Caution As connecting cables use shielded twisted pair cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder 1 FX3Gc 32MT D Rotary encoder 2 2 PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder FX3GC 32MT DSS Source input wiring Rotary encoder Phase Z 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 148 FX3GC Series Progr
226. g A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI EOIJIN8dS Jo Bui jo sejdwexg 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Terminal Arrangement 8 3 Terminal Arrangement 1 FX 16E TB FX 16E TB UL When connected to the FX3uUc FXa2nc I O extension blocks connector type or FX2N 16EYT C a k FX 16E TB FE BEERS RS Lower numbers Higher numbers Higher numbers ERR Ea Ea Es EERE EARS ESE 2 FX 32E TB FX 32E TB UL When connected to the FX3UC FX2NC I O extension blocks connector type or FX2N 16EYT C Lower numbers Higher numbers CN2 e 1 3 com 5 7 com 1 3 CoM 5 7 CoM p gt o 2 com 4 6 jcom o 2 com 4 6 com CN1 CN2 ra zi ya Be N Lower numbers Higher numbers o T e 1 3 com 5 7 com 1 3 com 5 7 COM 0 2 com 4 6 com o 2 com 4 6 Com When connected to the FX2N 16EX C Lower numbers Higher numbers 24 1 3 te Ps 7 tT ett sate 5 7 a Oo 2 ee el eo a Sea ere CN1 CN2
227. g to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems e When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block e Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end shoul
228. ge the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems e When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block e Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire
229. grammable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 11 Number of occupied I O points and 5 V DC current consumption eee Number of input output 5 V DC current Division Model name points consumption mA FX2N 16EYT 16 180 6 FX2N 16EYT C 1 180 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe 4 Special function devices Division Modeiname Number of input output 5V DC current 3 points consumption mA oo go FX3U 4DA o f a 4 8 w D3 gS FRONLC ee f 6 For the number of input output occupied points refer to the table below 7 Modelname Number of input output occupied points sem Use the following formula eee c FX3U 16CCL M 2 So FX2N 16CCL M Remote I O stations x 32 points 8 points F a N h FX2N 64CL M Total number of input output points in remote I O stations 8 points FX3U 128ASL M Set value of rotary switch 8 points 8 D 5 Extension power supply unit Connector conversion adapter 5 w Division Modellname Number of input output 5V DC current S points consumption mA gt FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2NC CNV IF Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 43 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration When the main unit is the FX3Gc 32MT D 1 System equipment FX3GC JFX2NC FX2NC FX3uUC FX
230. h 47 ANR Annunciator Reset 08 Start a FOR NEXT Loop 48 Le 4 09 End a FOR NEXT Loop 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point Move and Compare High Speed Processing 10 Compare 50 REF Refresh 11 Zone Compare 54 f 12 MOV Move 52 Input Matrix 13 Shift Move 53 High Speed Counter Set 14 CML Complement 54 High Speed Counter Reset 15 Block Move 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 16 Fill Move 56 SPD Speed Detection 17 i 57 Pulse Y Output 18 Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 19 BIN Conversion to Binary 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Arithmetic and Logical Operation Handy Instruction 20 ADD Addition 60 Initial State 21 SUB Subtraction 61 SER Search a Data Stack 22 MUL Multiplication 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 23 DIV Division 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer 24 Increment 64 e 25 Decrement 65 Le 26 Logical Word AND 66 Alternate State 27 WOR Logical Word OR 67 Ramp Variable Value 28 Logical Exclusive OR 68 Lo 4 Rotation and Shift Operation External FX I O Device 30 31 ROL Rotation Left Rotation Right N N O 32 N N DSW Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input N wo SFTR Bit Shift Right 35 SFTL Bit Shift Left 36 WSFR Word Shift Right 37 WSFL Word Shift Left 38 SFWR Shift Write FIFO FILO Control 78 FROM Read From A Special Function Block 39 SFRD Shift Read FIFO Control 79 O Write To A Special Function Block N EN SEGL Seven Segment With Latch N N N oO Se
231. h the partition part of the terminal block F SaN FE acd eet B 9 n D v w O Q Q Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny S L 73 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 Generic Specifications 3 1 Generic Specifications Item Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Noise resistance Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Grounding Working atmosphere Working altitude Specification O to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm When installed on DIN rail eter _ Sweep Count for X Y Z 10 times 10 to 57 When installed directly 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11 ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000 Vp p noise width of 1 us rise time of 1 ns and period of 30 to 100 Hz 500 V AC for one minute Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5 MQ or more by 500 V DC megger Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts lt 2000
232. hat the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning 218 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Bion a operation Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time started gt Tl outside range from 0 to 32767 The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit lt Limit cycle method gt and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller TD outside range from 0 to 32767 value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction 6762 Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already Check to make sure the port is not specified by another Continues used in another communication instruction operation Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes 6760 ABS data read from servo sum check error
233. he table below B g Countermeasures When the input Check whether a diode or parallel resistors is not built in the input equipment 8 turns ON If a diode or parallel resistors is built in refer to Subsection 5 2 4 In the FX3GC 32MT D remove the external wiring and confirm using the tester that the voltage between the D COM terminal and an input terminal is approximately 24 V DC When the input voltage is less than 20 4 V DC check whether the supply voltage in the PLC and extension power supply unit is 24 V DC 20 15 a When the input e Check the external wiring connected equipment configuration and extension cable connection ao does not turn ON In the FX3GC 32MT DSS confirm using the tester that the voltage between the COMA terminal and an input 9 g 5 terminal is approximately 24 V DC When the input voltage is less than 20 4 V DC check whether the supply voltage in the PLC and extension power supply is 24 V DC 20 15 Check the external wiring connected equipment configuration and extension cable connection 2 Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is larger than 1 5 mA it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 5 2 4 221 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 7 Troubleshooting 10 7 3 Cautions
234. hut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10ms Output current At a circuit voltage of 240 V AC or less 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80 VA or less 100 V AC or 200 V AC can be driven For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 6 2 2 When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with this load DC circuit Diode for commutation AC circuit Surge absorber Open circuit leakage current Because there is no leakage current even while output contacts are OFF the neon ball etc can be driven directly 140 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 4 External wiring precautions UNO 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output NO SUOISUBWUIG lobe 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit It is recommended to use gueuey GO W inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in
235. id isch So P g 2 mA 200 V AC Response time 2 2 ms or less Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Operation indicator LED lights when photo thyristor power is supplied Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24 V DC 3 3kQ 24V DC 7mA goea Input output circuitry CN1 1 Connector side External wiring 1 In systems where frequent large load ON OFF switching occurs due to rush currents the root mean square current should be 0 2 A or less lt Example gt 4A ee 42 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 _ _ 0 2A 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 sec sec sec 2 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 194 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 13 FX 16EYS TB 8 13 2 Internal circuit UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe thyristor 3 Q i O00 to OO7 Lower numbers A A0 to A A7 Higher numbers gt Surge absorbers are connected to each output m0 1 2 3 004 567 440123 444567 4 i ge ANY AZ ISNI AW AZ SN AW AZ S AY AZ H S F zaen eao 0 TL 2 Jeon 4 Le Teo o TT 2 Jeon a J 6 Eo 1 COM2 or COM3 in accordance with connected connector ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS 8 13 3 Example of output external wiring Surge absorbers are connected to each output indino oe n00 1 2 3 004567 0123 444567 9 z Q aj 5 Photo coupler a power supply E TE a 9 9
236. ife of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush jy D eJ overcurrent is shut down 2 Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load For precautions on the input output extension block refer to Subsection 6 2 4 2 8 For precautions on inductive loads for the terminal block refer to Subsection 8 8 4 2 x Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make 3 sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance D load S o 2 Lamp load 9 g 5 Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load refer to the specification for each model For specifications on the input output extension blocks refer to Subsection 6 2 1 For specifications on the terminal block refer to Subsection 8 8 1 and Subsection 8 9 1 209 FX3GC Series Progra
237. ifications Item Specifications Remarks Nominal voltage Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005 9 3 Setting for Battery The battery is not incorporated in the main unit at shipment from the factory It is necessary to attach the optional battery if backup is required In addition the battery mode is set via a parameter 9 3 1 Procedures for replacing battery Before replacing the battery Step 4 of the replacement procedure below must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3 or the memory content could be lost Turn the power OFF Remove the main unit Disconnect all connected cables including the power cable I O cable communication cable and extension cable Remove the main unit from the DIN rail For the removal method refer to Section 3 3 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Setting for Battery Remove the battery cover Attach a screwdriver to the battery cover on the underside of the PLC as shown in the right figure 1 Slightly move the 2 side of the battery cover Grasp the cover between your fingers and remove it Remove the old battery if it is connected Extract the old battery from the battery holder and disconnect the battery connector Install the new battery Connect the battery connector to the new battery and insert the battery into the battery holder Attach the battery cover Caut
238. igh speed counter input terminals For wiring refer to 7 2 Rotary Encoder High speed Counters C235 to C255 For programming refer to programming manual Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Input terminals of main unit Open collector transistor output form applicable to 24 V DC 114 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 The device list of the high speed counter 4 Response Frequency Data length External reset External start kHz input terminal input terminal None None 32 bit bi directional counter 32 bit bi directional counter mone Device No counter C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 1 phase 1 count input C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C248 OP C247 C248 C249 C250 Counter type O O O 1 phase 2 count input O C251 0 C253 OP None None C254 OP 32 bit 2 phase 2 count input C252 C253 C254 C255 bi directional counter None 1 When using multiple high speed counters make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed the overall frequency op For details on the overall frequency refer to Subsection 5 5 5 115 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoneoyioads A ddng Jamog A ep O D Q Q a O 5 7 indu SUOI eOIIOedS ind
239. in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword carefully If you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Cautions in using peripheral devices not supporting the 2nd keyword Sequence programs where the second keyword has been registered cannot be all cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the second keyword 3 Cautions in using peripheral devices not supporting the customer keyword Sequence programs where the customer keyword has been registered cannot be all cleared using a peripheral device that does not support the customer keyword 4 Non resettable protect function When the non resettable protect function is set the protect function cannot be reset 222 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 1 Version Upgrade History UOISJO UONELWUOJU Appendix A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability B MU Appendix A 1 Version Upgrade History SE Appendix A 1 1 How to look at manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the name plate and LOT indicated on z the front of the product 1 Checking the na
240. ine together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install the product so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure ndu OW ep O D Q QO A lt O 5 7 WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING N e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 3 2 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product S5 e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or D P O wiring work a Failure to do so may cause electric shock 104 Bui jo sojdwexg s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 127 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may dama
241. ing a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS indino oO Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 8 Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual F Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touc
242. ink MODBUS communication etc Communication data format error Command error Modem initialization error Continues Check programs according to the applications operation N N network parameter error s Remeiemaintenance N N network setting error Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the Parallel link character error AT commands e Wiring Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring Parallel link format error Inverter communication error MODBUS communication error Special adapter connection error Check connection of the special adapter Something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC Consult Memory access error ne y your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Operation circuit error Isolate the PLC and supply power to it using a different power supply If the ERR LED turns OFF noise may be affecting the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and installation location Fit anoise filter onto the power supply line If the ERR LED does not turn OFF even after the above actions are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Stops operation 1 O bus error M8069 ON i i Verify that extension cables are correctly connected Powered extension unit 24 V failure M8069 ON Check user program Watchdog timer error The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 When turning the po
243. ino suoeoineds Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 2 Allocation of device numbers to input numbers The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table When high speed counters are used the filter constant of the corresponding input numbers automatically change X000 X001 X003 and X004 10 us X002 X005 X006 and X007 50 us The input terminals not allocated for high speed counters can be used as general input terminals 1 Allocation table U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input R External reset input S External start input Input allocation B ea O a Counter type Counter No C237 Ls ss O os etl E EEE ee a _ input cao ec ea ell 206 Lae a2 a O O OO O seal o O M E ea fo O l efr f gt e popo O O M a 1 phase2 count C248 PUR mn ee ee ee a a E e E a ned eo O E E E R ea fa e a D S S S E E L E es ees 1 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program the input terminals and their associated functions are switched For the function switching method refer to Subsection 5 5 7 2 Restricti
244. ioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s SsN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO 9 g 5 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Special parameter error M8489 D8489 PPE Turn OFF the power and check the power supply and Special parameter setting time out error connection of special adapters special blocks Special parameters are set improperly e Confirm troubleshooting for special adapters special Special parameter setting error blocks and set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and then turn ON the power Contents of error Action 0001 o002 1 Continues operation Special parameters are set but special adapters special blocks are not connected Check whether special adapters special blocks are connected 0003 Special parameter transfer target unconnected error Check that special parameters with unsupported settings are 1 HOH04 not set for connected special adapters special blocks Special parameter unsupported function 1 LILI indicates the following values for each special adapter special block where an error has occurred If an er
245. ion 216 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation S Contents of error Action code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction N Label is undefined or out of PO to P4095 due to indexing 6701 Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction cannot be used g 2 in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the 5 instruction program and check the contents of the operands used in 6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more applied instructions E Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation 6703 Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more error may still occur 3 6704 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more For example a 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device T3002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the as timer T400 would attempt to be accessed This would cause zE 6706 Device number range or data value for operand of applied an operation error since there is no T400 device available Sy instruction exceeds limit O n 6707 File register is accessed without parameter setting of file register This error occurs in the execution of ope
246. ion 1 Battery replacement requires users to verify data integrity such as the PLC program latched battery backed device values and RTC values Before switching the PLC to RUN ensure the safety of the operation 2 Ifthe battery backed data becomes unstable clear the latched battery backed devices and transfer the data again Set the RTC and default values again if necessary For the clear method of keeping devices refer to the programming manual 9 3 2 Setting the battery mode The following setting using a parameter is required to use the battery Note that the battery does not back up the data if the following setting is not provided For the backup target data refer to Section 9 1 Onthe PLC System 1 tab on the FX Parameter window check the check box Use the battery Refer to the window below FX Parameter Memory Capacity PLC Name PLC System 1 luc System 2 Positioning Battery Mode Put a check mark to the check box Use the battery MODEM Initialized None x RUN Terminal Input None v Print Window Print Window Preview Default End Cancel 201 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe suaus Q suoneaoadg A ddng 12mod A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS 104 Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuluua OO 10 Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Batt
247. ion approx 10 ms is caused Therefore it is best to use a transistor output type PLC Applied instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time HSCS HSCR 6 instructions HSZ The overall frequency changes when the HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is used For details on the overall frequency refer to Subsection 5 5 5 120 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 5 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency UNO 1 Response frequency and overall frequency When any of the following functions instructions is used the overall frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs and observe the specified overall frequency range N lobe e When two or more high speed counters are used e When the HSCS HSCR HSZ PLSY PLSR DSZR TBL ZRN PLSV DRVI or DRVA instruction is used e When the pulse width cycle measurement function is used SUOISUBWUIG Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction Response 9 Counter type Frequency When HSCS HSCR or HSZ When HSCS HSCR or HSZ D 3 instruction is not used instruction is used C235 C236 C238 S phase C239 C241 ddia ara E237 C240 C242 input i i P C243 C244 C245 10 khz pads re 4 1 phase C246 C248 OP
248. ion power supply unit Refer to Section 1 10 This configuration includes the following equipment that fall under the restriction for the number of connectable units FX2NC 16EYR T FX2N 16EYR There is no problem with this configuration since it satisfies the restriction for the number of connectable units 5 units 45 2 SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey Q suolyeoljioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH EOIJIN9dS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy sesp SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aayeg O _ Buooys jqnosj soueLeu zuleN uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 12 Selection Calculation Example 1 for System Configuration 1 12 1 Re examination of suitability for configuration In this configuration it is necessary to add an extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V due to the restrictions in 5 V DC power supply capacity Construct the system as follows Components after countermeasures Connect the extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V in place of the FX2NC CNV IF FX3GC JFX2NC FX2NC FX3uUC FX3UC FX3U FX2N FX2N 32MT DI16EX 16EYR TI4AD 1PS 5V 4DA 16EX 16EYR Reexamination of system configuration availability 1 Restriction for the number of input output points There is no problem since the number of input output points in the new system is 112 2 Restriction for the 5 V D
249. iring A 24V DC power is supplied to the main unit of the FX3Gc PLC A dedicated connector is used for the power supply For wiring refer to Section 3 6 Example of the FX3Gc 32MT D FX2N OOEX 24 ls 2 3 4 19 FX2NC CNV IF Special adaptor 24V DC Analog i Circuit Protector FX3Gc 32MT D Power supply ON PL Mc QS FX2Nc LILIEX MC Emergency FX2NC 16EX T H stop or FX2NC FX3UC eases special function block FX2Nc OLEX FX2NC 16EX T or F X2NC FX3UC special function block FX3UC 1PS 5V MC MC 24V DC 24V DC FX2Nc LIDIEYT FX2nc OOEYR T Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC l output terminals As for the details of emergency stop operation see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less terminal is only for the FX2NC FX3UC Series special function block The same power source for the main unit extension power supply units special adapters and special function blocks is preferable When using the different power source from the main unit turn ON the peripheral devices power simultaneously or earlier than the main unit s When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc Use a fuse suitable for
250. it blocks in which 1 ms timers T246 to T249 and T256 to T319 are added in edited circuits Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits e Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction e TBL FNC152 instruction Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN mode 1 Circuit blocks cannot be edited to insert a label as shown below when written during RUN Step FNC 04 0 El i C gt Added deleted or changed 00 FNC 06 Pointer for FEND interrupt Label is inserted by editing the circuit block 1001 r C gt C gt Added deleted or changed FNC 03 IRET E Z D 226 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 2 Programming Tool Applicability Item Circuit blocks which require attention on operation after write during RUN Others Caution Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output e DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instructions with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC158 and DRVA FNC159 instructions Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC immedi
251. it loads including inverters 7 For the maximum specified resistance load refer to Subsection 6 2 1 SE p25 eet B o n D D w O Q o Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 139 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 3 Handling of relay output 1 Output terminal One common terminal is used for 1 4 or 8 relay output points The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100 V AC and 24 V DC The FX2NC 16EYR T DS has two COM terminals per 8 output points Connect two COM terminals outside the PLC so that the load applied on each COM terminal becomes smaller External power supply Use an external power supply of 30 V DC or less or 240 V AC or less 250 V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards for loads Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another Display of operation When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is turned on and from when the coil is s
252. ition 8 12 FX 16EYT ESS TB UL 8 12 4 External wiring precautions UNnO 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the Fuse output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity N jeu19 x3 SUOISUBWUIG Terminal block 2 Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads gueuey Q l ae inductive 9 The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is 8 equipped with a Zener diode 50 V for protection When sf an inductive load is connected however a diode should gt be connected parallel to the load when required The diode must comply with the specifications shown below 4 Counter voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage ee Forward current Load current or more Bs 3 wp C 3 Interlock P eks orwar oS For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where limit PLC output Interlock a hazardous condition could result if switched ON 5 simultaneously an external interlock should be provided ndu OW for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to 3 the right Reverse 2 limit S O indino suoneayoadg Jo Bui jo sejdwexy s SsN SNOEN 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 193
253. je O gt g o o ol o o x e Oo o O oO 8 eo eo 0 6 X Y o o o o AN o Output Y TS ll KA a eile 6 OD ZB o o o o oO ZA AB oO o Oo o 2 0 E j o o o o F SS N fav eis So N lt ndu OW 2 Preparation of the I O connection connector SUOI eOIIOedS 1 Compliant connectors commercially available connectors Use a 20 pin 1 key socket connector conforming to MIL C 83503 Confirm in advance that the connectors do not interfere with other parts including connector covers indino e One common terminal covers 32 input output terminals 2 Input output cables available from Mitsubishi a Input output cables with attached connectors are available S je 5m e Single wire Wire color red FX 16E 500CAB S 16 4 General purpose input output cable PLC side A 20 pin connector 1 5 m T FX 16E 150CAB 411 ann SEQ 3m e Flat cables with tube 923 OE ee 9 10 e A 20 pin connector at both ends 2 SP a Cables for connecting the FX Series terminal block D 9 FX 16E 500CAB 16 4 with input output connectors For the connection with FX Series terminal block FX 16E 150CAB R i refer to Chapter 8 Terminal Block Specifications 8 11 and External Wiring S 3m e Round multicore cables 2 PA OE OE AER 9 10 e A 20 pin connector at both ends z 5m w FX 16E 500CAB R 16 4 33 1 5m e Flat cables with tube pe ASAE OOCAB 411 e PLC side Two 20 pin connec
254. k The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D output extension block FX2NC 16EYT FX2NC 16EYT FX3GC 32MT D Transistor output sink COM1 COM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Yo24 Y025 Yo26 Y027 k 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit and a transistor output source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 16EYT DSS Transistor output Source O F fi ye FX3GC 32MT DSS 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output k 10 f0 TOR 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 160 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 7 6 2 When BCD instructions are used UNO This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment display 1 Main unit N Example of program ge M8000 P D m D100 K2Y010 a Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring a Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit 8 z The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT D ais 5 FX3GC 32MT D z Transistor output sink Yy D COM1 COM1 Y010 Y011 Y0
255. ks FX2NC Series special function blocks FX3uUC Series special function blocks Extension power supply unit Battery FX Series terminal blocks Extension cables Input output cables Connectors for input output Power cable CC Link master CC Link LT master Intelligent device stations Remote device stations Description Generic name for FX3G Series PLCs Generic name for FX3Gc Series PLCs Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs Generic name for FX3UC Series PLCs Generic name for FX2N Series PLCs Generic name for FX2NC Series PLCs Abbreviation of FX3Gc Series PLCs Generic name for FX2N Series input output extension block FX2NC Series input output extension block Generic name for the following models FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYS FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Generic name for the following models FX2NC 16EX T FX2NC 16EX FX2NC 32EX FX2NC 16EYR FX2NC 16EYR T FX2NC 16EYT FX2NC 32EYT FX2NC 16EX T DS FX2NC 16EX DS FX2Nc 32EX DS FX2NC 16EYR T DS FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 32EYT DSS Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters Generic name for the following models FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U ENET ADP Generic name for the following models FX
256. l are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS sassaccisdacieviocaatvcedicnencteesancenis ca aideaceatadaaiesactadvaaiaraadsaupencicataccenaduaceiss 1 CAMO ANOS onset chi ocr at ek a ea a ete dae et occa aaa 9 Certification of UL cUL Standards caccicssace dciceccsianducesSesinresdectargelcagnesdanderselesiacncdiniarasicasauasdensectvinsevutde 9 Compliance with EC directive CE Marking ccccccccccsseecccseeeececeeseecseeceesaeeseesseseesseuseeseesessaaneeneeas 9 Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive ccccccccseececesececeeeceeeee cesses ceesaeeeesaueeesseesesseeeeeanaaees 9 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive ccccccccccccsseccececeeeeeeeeseeeceeseeceeseeeeesseeeessaeeeesaeeeees 12 Caution for compliance with EC Directive ccccccccccecccceeececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeauecessaeeeesaeeeeesaaaees 13 PASSOCUALCC VAIN ANS is scsi 2a doa a eee ee eee 14 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals ccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenensees 18 1 Outline 20 Med IWIAJ OR RC AUIS pi co shag ern ae ei att telat eas ae ens Fle ac tak ce teenie lie batet 20 RnR ANAME Suse celia ec aa a a meueiecs amucnmbaanegernccenee 22 RE Pai Fal wo a Gee wo 7911 4 0S oy Feina a an ee ER ae a En ene es a er enn an a ea 22 1 3 Interpr
257. l communication error 2 ch2 PLC is detected by M8438 T Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 8 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is executed 235 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition C Operation of Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8517 Correspond ing special device Number and name Operation and function Parallel Link Parallel link Set M8070 when using master station M8070 Parallel link Set M8071 when using slave station M8071 Parallel link eure ON when operating Parallel link M 8073 ON when M8070 or M8071 setting is incorrect bald Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Pulse width Pulse period measurement function M 8075 Pulse width Pulse period i measurement setting flag X000 Pulse width Pulse period D8074 to eure measurement flag D8079 X001 Pulse width Pulse period D8080 to ene measurement flag D8085 X003 Pulse width Pulse period D8086 to eure measurement flag D8091 X004 Pulse width Pulse period D8092 to See measurement flag D8097 X000 Pulse period measurement D8074 to M 8081 X001 Pulse period measurement D8080 to mode D8085 X003 Pulse period measurement D8086 to X004 Pulse period measurement D8092 to Flag M18090 to IMJ8T00 Notused Memory Information M 8101 M 8102 M 8103 Not used M 8104 M1810 M 8106 M 8107 Not used M 8108 Output R
258. lector transistor Input signal form Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Input operation display Turning on the input will light the LED indicator lamp Sink input wiring Sink input wiring Input circuit configuration 1 Input impedance 102 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 5 2 2 Input Derating Curve UNO When extension blocks are connected the derating curve below shows the simultaneous ON ratio of all available PLC inputs with respect to the ambient temperature Use the PLC within the simultaneous input ON ratio range shown in the figure N Derating curve simultaneous ON ratio Supply voltage 24V DC lobe SUOISUBWUIG on O gueuey Q applicable D 20 C 40 C 55 C Ambient temperature 8 5 2 3 Handling of 24 V DC input 4 MU Be 1 Input terminals al When an input turns ON the input indicator LED turns ON in the main unit or input output extension block for SS FX2N FX2NC Multiple input COM terminals are connected inside the PLC One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting Os e Dedicated to sink input types only 2 When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor output is connected between an input
259. lobe coupler suaus Q O00 to O07 Lower numbers A AO to A A7 Higher numbers 0o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 12 3 444 56 7 suoneaoadg A ddng 12mod A SUOI EOIJIO8dS 1 COM2 or COM3 in accordance with connected connector ndu OW 8 10 3 Example of output external wiring SUOI eOIIOedS PLC output 0500 12 3 004567 440 1 2 3 444 567 6 No DO a ssw ese ooo EN D 9 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 187 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 10 FX 16EYT TB 8 10 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity 2 Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is equipped with a Zener diode 50 V for protection When an inductive load is connected however a diode should Fuse be connected parallel to the load when required The diode must comply with the specifications shown below Counter voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Terminal block Forward current Load current or more 3 Interlock Forward
260. locks FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks DIN rail or direct mounting Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or write debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit connector conversion adapter and Battery DIN rail only 72 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work Users Manual Hardware Edition UNO e When a dust proof sheet is supplied with an extension block keep the sheet applied to the ventilation slits during installation and wiring work N WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING J m e Make sure to cut off all phases of th
261. m 3 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 Other equipment Other equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed Other equipment 3 The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage 74 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work Users Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Installation location 3 2 Installation location Install the PLC in an environment conforming to the generic specifications Section 3 1 installation precautions Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 or more between the unit main body and another device or structure Install the unit as far away as possible from high voltage lines high voltage devices and power equipment Do not install the PLC on a floor a ceiling or a vertical surface Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below Configuration without l extension cable Configuration with extension cable D gt CNV IF Main unit FX2NC 16EX 7 FX2NC SUOI EOIJIO8dS FX3GC Main unit FX2NC 16EYT FX3U 4AD ADP FX2NC 16EX Other equipment Ea FXON 65EC FXON 30EC Other equipment Other equipment gt 50mm 1 97 75 UNO N lobe D 5 o O 5 D SUOIJEOIJIN8dS 9aUas A ddng Jamog A ndu OQ SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIO9dS
262. master block is used For the method of calculating the number of I O points refer to Subsection 1 8 1 Maximum number of Number of input Number of input output AnyWireASLINK remote I O input output points output points occupied points x 8 128 256 points A B C D units gt U SS ia points T S points Number of points F Maximum number of gt Total number of Remote I O assigned to points controllable on occupied by special system input output points ene isan ieaeie AnyWireASLINK master For details refer to Subsection 1 8 1 A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of input output points occupied by special B Number of input output points of input output extension function blocks blocks E Number of remote I O points assigned to C Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M AnyWireASLINK master 1 With regard to remote I O of the AnyWireASLINK input output points set by the rotary switch of the AnyWireASLINK master are assigned When using together with the CC Link master make sure that the total number of remote I O points in CC Link and AnyWireASLINK master is 128 or less For details refer to FX3U 128ASL M User s Manual Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration For the main unit input output extension blocks and AnyWireASLINK the number of input output points and the total number of points are restricted X00
263. me plate 8 The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number S N indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example nameplate manufacturer s serial number 1210001 S17 UORONJSU J seoinaq jeloeds MODEL Right side FAsce S2MT D gt 0uT 5 30vbc 0 1A S N E Sig ag 25 MADE IN JAPAN S 2 T Cow H 5 gt a0 Control number gs 8 Month Example Jan 5s 2 1 to 9 January to September or X October Y November Z December S Year Example 2012 Last two digit of year G 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product seje s Jaquiew ng ul s n yeq jo Buljpuey Egoni Example Jan 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2012 Last two digit of year 223 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 2 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A 1 2 Version check method 1 4 0 ee L Version information Example Ver 1 40 PLC type Example 26 FX3Gc PLC Appendix A 1 3 Version upgrade history FX3GC Series performed the following upgrade
264. mmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 10 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC 10 5 1 POW LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC Remedies Power of the specified voltage is being On correctly supplied to the power supply The power supply is normal terminal One of the following problems may have occurred Power of the specified voltage and Flashing current is not being supplied to the power supply terminal External wiring is incorrect Internal error of PLC e Check the supply voltage e After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the problem persists consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative One of the following problems may have occurred e f the power is not off check the power supply and the power supply route Ne pewersuppys ou If power is being supplied correctly consult your local Mitsubishi Electric External wiring is incorrect Off representative Power of the specified voltage is not being supplied to the power supply terminal The power cable is broken e After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If the problem persists consult
265. mples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4 digit 7 segment display lobe 1 Main unit SUOISUBWUIG Example of program suaus Q g Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring gt Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT D 4 ASe AS FX3GC 32MT D 2S 53 Transistor output sink T per 7 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring 10 in the case of transistor output ndu QT SUO eOIIOedS indino ep O O h O O gt N 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output transistor output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT DSS FX3GC 32MT DSS Transistor output Source 8 VO VO Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013 Y014 Y015 Y016 Y017 IR PARC USEC RCL aca EE E A fe E erenicendins 1 J in the case of transistor output Q Q Aayeg QO 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 159 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 2 Output extension block Example of program Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit and a transistor output sink only output type output extension bloc
266. ms or less Response time HV ON OFF 10 ms or less D e E Output circuit insulation Photo thyristor insulation Q D Output operation display LED on panel lights when photo thyristor is driven ss ndu QT Output circuit diagram ep O D Q QO A lt O 5 7 External power supply 6 3 2 Handling of triac output 1 Output terminals 7 On the triac output type blocks one common terminal is used for FX2N 16EYS Pe 8 points 3 Therefore the common terminal blocks can drive loads of ain different circuit voltage systems for example 100 V AC and 200 B g V AC 8 D 8 2 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and the output element triac are insulated with a photo thyristor The common terminal blocks are separate from one another Aayeg 3 Display of operation When the photo thyristor is driven the LED is lit and the output triac is turned on _ 4 Response time The time from when the photo thyristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is turned off is 1ms or less and 10 ms or less respectively Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 143 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Triac SSR Output FX2N 16EYS 5 Output current The max current per output point is 0 3 A However to restrict temperature rise the max current per one output
267. n below are not supported 3 Unsupported Applications S High speed counter input interruption pulse catch pulse width pulse period measurement function mign speed processing speed detection SPD instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction 7 Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction seu 3 The applications shown below are not supported FE e e Unsupported Applications S S jy D h Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction zero return ZRN instruction Pulse output DOG search zero return DSZR instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction 8 drive to absolute DRVA instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction D Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction 5 Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction w O Q Q 4 The table below shows the drive power supply for each connection destination Connection destination Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX 24 V DC 48 mA FX2N 16EX C 24 V DC 160 mA Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 29 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 4 List of Products
268. n phase manner Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 141 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Relay Output 6 2 5 Example of external wiring FX3GC 32MT D 5 to 30V DC Load oe e FX2Nc relay output extension block i A Vacant terminal FX2NC CNV IF FX2N relay output extension block 5A LED Load N Y001 aie Y002 Solenoid Lea YOO3 ss AC power supply 250V AC or less i 5A Load Yo04 YOO cant terminal WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 142 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Triac SSR Output FX2N 16EYS 6 3 Triac SSR Output FX2N 16EYS UNO 6 3 1 Specifications N Item Triac output specification Number of output points 16 points 2 Ki Connecting type Terminal block a External power supply 85 to 242 V AC S Output type Triac output SSR Resistance The total load current per common should be as follows 0 3 A point 3 ros fee load 8 output points common 0 8 A or less ax loa Inductive 15 VA 100 V AC Oo load 36 VA 200 V AC 8 3 Minimum load Oat NOOO 8 i 1 6 VA 200 V AC S Open circuit leakage current TATOV AS gt g 2 mA 200 V AC 4 OFF ON 1
269. nannash a a e a a 200 9 3 1 Procedures for replacing battery cc ccceecccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeessaaeees 200 93 2 SEWING the Dattery Moderar a e a E Guess aed 201 9 4 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program EXxaMpIe cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 202 9 5 Battery life amp replacement QUuIGELINGS ec ceccceeeccseececeeeeeceseeceeeeceueecseseeceueesseseeseaeeeseneeeseaess 202 9 6 Reading the date On imanulaClure in otnasctorenandsartateedawentrdsaniatrodaresironnelsinederaanceertatnedaxeatedeamadsasanet 202 9 7 Battery Related Precautions 4 uri coe testa teeters acest sesh E O A E na 202 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 203 10 1 Preparation for Test Operation cccccccccccecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeceecesseeeeeeeesseeeeseeesseeeseeeessaeeeees 204 10 4131 Preliminary inspection power OFF ac2cesed Astle Po ie ee esa winnie 204 10 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector power ON PLC STOP ccccccseeeeeeees 204 10 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON cccccsecceseececeeceeseeeesseeeeseeeesaneeeseeeetaeeeees 205 10 2 1 Methods of running and stopping ccccsseececceeeeeeecceeesecceusssceeceusececsuaueeeesseeeeeessseeessaneeeeess 205 10 2 2 Use of several running Stopping Methods ccccceeeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaseeeeeesaaeeeeesssaeeeeeeneas 20
270. nd Peripheral Equipment Connectability 223 Appendix A 1 Version Upgrade History ccccccssccsscceseecseeceeeceeeceuecesecueeseeeeeeeseessueesaeesaass 223 Appendix A 1 1 How to look at manufacturer s Serial nNUMber ccccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeaeesetaneees 223 Appendix A 1 2 Version check met d aoiseanna haaa a eaa EEE aes 224 Appendix A 1 3 Version upgrade NIStOLY cccccccceeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeessaeessaeeseneeseneeeees 224 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Appendix A 2 Programming Tool Applicability cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaees 224 Appendix A 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tOOl ccccceccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeessaeeeaaeeees 224 Appendix A 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable ccccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 224 Appendix A 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tools ccccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaes 225 Appendix A 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of special adapter 225 Appendix A 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN cccccceccccceecceseeeeeceeececeeeceseeeceseeecesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeaees 226 Appendix A 3 Use of Built in USB Programming Polt ccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 228 Appendix A 3 1 Installation Of USB driver
271. ndustrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog products or through a user s program in the FX3GC Series PLC main unit 13 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Associated Manuals User s Manual Hardware Edition Associated Manuals FX3GC Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3GC Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices refer to the relevant manuals Indispensable manuals Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manual Manual Name Contents Number Manuals for PLC main unit MIFX3GC PLC main unit Supplied Excerpts from the FX3Gc Series User s Manual A nA FX3GC Series JY997D45101 Hardware Edition describing input output specifications i HARDWARE MANUAL wiring and installation of FX3GC Series PLC main units prod
272. ng table Appendix F 1 Regulated FX3Gc Series products 1 Included modules and batteries None FX3GC Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory 2 Batteries to be built in modules spare parts and optional parts Product supply Lithium Content 4 r Product name Battery type gram unit Mass gram unit 1 The value indicates the mass with packaging Appendix F 2 Transport guidelines Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG code and the local transport regulations when transporting products listed above Also consult with the shipping carrier 257 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO BOULWJOJIOd gJ suoneoyoadg 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU J seoinaq jeloeds m 3J Own Qao D O oO gt G Qa JO SuONNedaJd G s e s Jequiew ng ul s n yeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers F Precautions for Battery Transportation User s Manual Hardware Edition F 2 Transport guidelines MEMO 258 FX3GC Series Program mable Controllers G Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States User s Manual Hardware Edition G 1 Disposal precautions gt Appendix G Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in 2 Batteries in EU Member States B This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting as batteries and or devices with built in ba
273. nnector Ss Output type form Transistor source output me External power supply 5 to 30 V DC aon ee Resistance load 0 5 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less ax loa Inductive load 12 W 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30 V DC OFF gt ON 0 2 ms or less 24 V DC Response time ON gt OFF 1 5 ms or less 24 V DC Output element s ON voltage 1 5 V ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation indino xe Operation indicators LED lights when photo coupler power is supplied 3 Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24 V DC D 3 lt sm Input output circuitry S 2 S TE CN1 ZSR Connector side P 9 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 191 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 12 FX 16EYT ESS TB UL 8 12 2 Internal circuit Photo coupler O00 to LIL 7 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers 0o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 141 V1 or V2 in accordance with connected connector 8 12 3 Example of output external wiring PLC output No 000 12 3 004 5 6 7 AAQ 1 2 3 AA4 5 6 7 192 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Ed
274. ns e Conducted RF e Power frequency magnetic field MELSEC FX2NnNc series manufactured FX2NC x EYT DSS FX2N 16EYR T DS FX2NC x EYT FX2NC 16EYR T Remark Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e Emission Enclosure port e Emission Low voltage AC mains port e Emission Telecommunications network port Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e RF Immunity e Fast Transients e ESD e Conducted e Surge e Power magnetic fields e Voltage drops and Voltage interruptions 10 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Standards Users Manual Hardware Edition Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL from September 1st 2010 FX2N 8EYR S ES UL For the products above PLCs manufactured before March 31st 2002 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN50082 2 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2007 Standard Remark EN61000 6 4 2007 Generic emission standard Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Industrial environment e Emission Enclosure port EN50081 2 1993 Electromagnetic compatibility e Emission Low voltage AC mains port e Emission Telecommunications network port EN50082 2 1995
275. nsion blocks and CC Link remote I O stations the number of input output a points and the total number of points are restricted S X000 to X017 X020 to X057 3 Input Output Main unit extension extension FX3U 16CCL M p block block 7 Y000 to Y017 Y020 to Y057 sem 32 0 0 32 Se 16 16 32 points 32 points 32 points 8 points 235 D 9 CC Link network ss Remote I O Remote I O Remote I O 8 8 points 16 points 32 points Number of input output points occupied b 7 by special function blocks 8 points v v 9 0 points 96 104 128 160 256 points a Number of remaining points r7 Number of input output points 96 points Y Z Aayeg Number of input output points excluding remote I O points on CC Link Number of input output occupied points Up to 128 points iNumber of 32 points x 3 units WN i remaining N L Coan i points Ra Pou NN Number of CC Link input output points Up to 128 points 256 points or less in total P an Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 37 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 8 Number of I O Points and Maximum Number of I O Points 1 8 3 Maximum number of input output points when AnyWireASLINK master is used 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points The maximum number of available input output points is as follows when AnyWireASLINK
276. nspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N WARNING m Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Use the battery for memory backup correctly in conformance to this manual Use the battery only for the specified purpose Connect the battery correctly Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive forces vibration impact drop etc to the battery Donot store or use the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight Do not expose to wa
277. o may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate
278. o sink 4 input types only zon For an input device having a parallel resistance or a nv a two wire proximity switch a Be E bleeder resistance may be T i required D 2 E Refer to Subsection 5 2 4 Se Photocoupler lt A ogee eee eee ne OS Two wir Qe FX3UC 1PS 5V proximity e DC DC sensor 3 converter indino WD 8 aj 5 FX2N extension block Dedicated to sink input types only T Photocoupler S x caz cR D 9 Input terminal 8 1 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3Gc z 4 2 Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 3 Use a fuse suitable for the system 3 Aayeg WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 107 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 2 Examples of sink input wiring Common to both sink and source input types FX3GC 32MT DSS DC DC converter Power connector Fuse g E E L E Handle the power supply circuit correctly in l l 24V DC accordance with Chapter Et 4 Power supply l l l Fase specifications and Fuse external wiring A 3 Three 2 1 Wire sensor For an input device having a parallel resistan
279. o the power consumption of the main unit and extension power supply unit When you connect special function blocks other than the ones listed in the following table refer to each N om manual 35 Power Power Power 2D Mogel name consumption moder name consumption model tame consumption FX2NC 16EX 2 2W FX2N 8ER 1 2W FX2N 16EX 2 2W FX2NC 16EX DS 2 2W FX2N 8ER ES UL 1 2W FX2N 16EX ES UL 2 2W 3 FX2NC 16EX T 2 2W FX2N 8EX 1 2W FX2N 16EX C 2 2W ie FX2NC 16EX T DS 2 2W FX2N 8EX ES UL 1 2W FX2N 16EXL C 0 3W 1 D FX2NC 16EYT 0 35W FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 0 2W 2 FX2N 16EYR 2 2W go FX2NC 16EYT DSS 0 35W FX2N 8EYR 1 2W FX2N 16EYR ES UL 2 2W 2 FX2NC 16EYR T 2 2W FX2N 8EYR ES UL 1 2W FX2N 16EYT 1 2W FX2NC 16EYR T DS 2 2W FX2N 8EYR S ES UL 1 2W FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 1 2W FX2NC 32EX 4 2W FX2N 8EYT 2 0W FX2N 16EYT C 2 2W DD FX2NC 32EX DS 4 2W FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 2 0W FX2N 16EYS 1 0W S S FX2NC 32EYT 0 7W FX2N 8EYT H 2 1W FX2N 2AD 2 3W us FX2NC 32EYT DSS 0 7W FX2N 2DA 1 4W BS 1 External 5V power supply is not included 2 AC input current is not included ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIO9dS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 95 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Example External Wiring 4 2 Example External Wiring 1 Example External W
280. o the device range and function range supported by the highest class model BOS FX1N or FX2N applicable in the product version 259 For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DU E FX 20DU E User s oo Manual JY992D54801 231 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers B Performance Specifications User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Performance Specifications Item Performance Operation control system Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function Batch processing system when END instruction is executed I BUSEMM EMG SPELL Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible 32000 step EEPROM memory Max allowable write 20 000 times Max memory capacity type Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running For the writing function during running refer to Appendix A 2 5 Program memory Writing function during Keyword function With keyword Customer keyword function Built in Real time clock Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C Sequence instructions 29 Kinds of SENSU le CUE Step ladder instructions 2 instructions Applied instructions 123 kinds Rene Standard mode 0 21 us instruction Basic instructions 3 Processing Extension mode
281. oad Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush 6 current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load go 3 Capacitive load a5 Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush S current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters 7 For the maximum specified resistance load refer to Subsection 8 8 1 lt smMm css D 2 9 g 5 Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny S L 183 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 9 FX 16EYR ES TB UL 8 9 FX 16EYR ES TB UL Connect the FX 16EYR ES TB UL to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector Connectable models FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIDEYT DSS The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable
282. oe supply a 7 FX3U 485ADP MB FX2NC 16EX DS FX3U ENET ADP 7 FX2NC 16EX T DS FX3UC 1PS SV FX3yu 4AD ADP J Baten FX2NC 16EYT DSS Connector conversion adapter FX2NC 32EYT DSS FX2NC CNV IF FX2NC 16EYR T DS FX3U 4DA ADP FX3uU 3A ADP FX3U 32BL FX2NC 32EX DS FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP BJ special function FX3U 4AD TC ADP blocks FX3UC 4AD FX2NC 4AD Connection to FX2NC 4DA programming tool RJ Extension power FX Series terminal Bg supply unit blocks i 3 FX 16E TB UL FX3UC 1PS 5V FX 39E TB UL y Programming FX 16EYR ES TB UL tool FX 16EYT ES TB UL FX 16EYT ESS TB UL Sele FX 16EYS ES TB UL 1 Use an extension power supply unit in either of the following positions Inside the E or fp group Between the EJ or group and the A or B group 2 For connection to a programming tool refer to Section 1 5 3 For connectable models refer to Chapter 8 C FX2N I O extension Blocks FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 16EYS E FX2N FX3U special function blocks FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA FX3U 4LC FX3U 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL FX3U 128ASL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA FX2N 4AD FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 8AD FX2N 2LC FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M C FX2N I O extension Blocks FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL
283. of Products 1 4 8 FX Series terminal blocks EX 16E TB 16 input points or 16 output points To be directly connected to the PLC 32 input points input output connector FX 32E TB 32 output points or 2 4 16 input output points FX 16EX A1 TB 2 a a 100 V AC input type 4 SUOISUBWUIG lobe FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYT TB 2 FX 16EYS TB 2 Relay output type 24 V DC 80 mA Transistor output type Sink output 24V DC 112 mA Triac output type 24 V DC 112 mA gueuey GO g FX 16E TB UL 16 input points or 2 16 output points To be directly connected to the PLC 4 D 32 input points input output connector 9 FX 32E TB UL 32 output points or a 16 input output points swsw o e e avama 4 FX 16EYT ES TB UL 3 ee ee Transistor output type Sink output 24 V DC 112 mA 2g O FX 16EYT ESS TB UL L fs Transistor output type Source output 24 V DC 112 mA aj z C FX 16EYS ES TB UL ff 16 Trac output type avoci2n E 1 The table below shows the drive power supply for each connection destination Connection destination Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption Input connector FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX Not required FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LILIEX DS FX2N 16EX C 24 V DC 112 mA 16 points Output connector FX3GC 32MT D FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIVIEYT FX2NC LILIEYT DSS FX2N 16EYT C ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS Power supply suitable to connected load is required indino er 7 2 The applications show
284. of Special Devices C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8517 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition A 5s Correspond Correspond OG Sumber and Operation and function ing special Numberand Operation and function ing special a2 name name device device Positioning RS2 FNC 87 ch0 M18330 to M18887 Not used M18370 TE PLSV FNC157 instruction M 8371 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Send wait flag B Acceleration deceleration operation m RS2 FNC 87 cho Send Da7 Yy M 8372 c end reques MIB995 a3 RS2 FNC 87 cho Q M 8340 Y000 Pulse output monitor M 8373 2 iam a _ D8373 E ON BUSY OFF READY 2 D 4 Y000 Clear signal output function M M M 8341 enable RS2 FNC 87 chO mete Time out check fla i 4 Y000 Zero return direction g M 8342 specification High Speed Counter Function o M 8343 Y000 Forward limit aa A bal Se ue M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit M 8388 Contact for high speed counter i z 7 7000 DOG signal logi function change Sg n Y Z int signal logi M 8346 ies A dae Jiga Function changeover device for D C248 and C253 Ta S M 8348 Y000 Positioning instruction M 8394 activation P Functi h ice f a M 8349 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8395 mal Enns ve eMcentor al Y001 Pulse output monitor M18396 4 Y001 Clear signal output function l 3 z M 8351 nable Ring Counter 3 8 Nn e P Y001 Zero return direction M
285. of a programming tool supporting the FX3Gc Programming Manual For peripheral devices not applicable to the FX3GC Series specify FX3G Series or FX1N Pulse output function Series for the model selection and you can When output terminals in the transistor output program the sequence In this case use type main unit are used pulses of up to 100 kHz instructions and devices within the ranges can be output simultaneously to 2 axes Y000 common to FX3GC Series and the selected and Y001 model of PLC Using a number of instructions programming is simplified Remote debugging of program Refer to Positioning Control Edition Programming software enables you to remotely transfer programs and monitor PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS 232C communication special adapter 20 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Major Features Various positioning instructions e AnyWireASLINK Refer to Positioning Control Edition Master station nal Instruction Description FX3U 128ASL M pszp___ Mechanical zero return instruction with DOG Slave station search function Refer to the manual for each product 2 Instruction to read the current value from our 4_ Note that the warranty etc on this product ABS servo amplifier with absolute position ABS differs from that on other programmable gy detecting function D SE ase ar controller products ol DRVI Senne eee re
286. of pulse width cycle measurement inputs X003 Aayeg Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 KHz 120 kHz lt Counter No gt lt Contents of use gt C235 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input bi C236 1 phase 1 counting 50 kHz is input 532 Total 100 kHz lt 120 kHz Overall frequency 2g 121 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 6 Related Devices High speed counter 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count Counter type Specifying device Up counting Down counting C235 M8235 C236 M8236 C237 M8237 C238 M8238 C239 M8239 1 phase 1 count input OFF ON C241 M8241 C242 M8242 C243 M8243 C244 M8244 C245 M8245 2 For monitoring the up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input counters Up counting Down counting C251 p MB O C252 E 2 phase 2 count input C253 M82853 oO C254 C255 ares 3 For switching high speed counter function M8388 pai for enanging nigh speed cpuner Changes the function of high speed counter M8392 Function Function switching devices devices Switches the function Switches the function of C248 and C253 C248 and C253 Subsection 5 5 7 M8395 Function a devices a the function of C254 Subsection 5 5 7 122 FX3GC Series Programmable
287. oints from the main unit and input output extension blocks calculated in the above step For the method of calculating the number of remote I O points refer to the FX2N 64CL M manual Count the number of input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of occupied input output points per unit is 8 The number of occupied input output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following formula or from the list shown below For a list of occupied input output points refer to Section 1 11 Number of special function Number of occupied Number of points per unit blocks input output points units 8 points points l Each special function block used for Total number of Number of special function i l ee FROM TO instructions occupies eight occupied input blocks input or output points output points Observe the following instructions when using the following products e FX3U 16CCL M CC Link master Only one FX3U 16CCL M unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit This master cannot be used together with FX2N 16CCL M FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master When more than one master station is connected a remote I O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and following master stations This master cannot be used together with FX3U 16CCL M and FX3uU 128ASL M FX3U 128ASL M AnyWireASLINK master Only one FX3uU 128ASL
288. omply with the PLC output following specifications contact Diode Guide for commutation Counter voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer etc parallel to the load inductive load Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is fester suitable for the load being used Refer to the table Surge below for other specifications aeeelbe Item Guide Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1 uF Forward current Approx 100 to 200 Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to Interlock Forward limit PLC output contact the right PLC output Reverse limit contact 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase x manner B 23 d Good 182 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 8 FX 16EYR TB 8 8 5 Product life of relay contacts UNO The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the loa
289. on connecting the minus line when using two or more external DC power supplies When supplying power from two or more power supply units due to insufficient capacity of each DC power D supply unit connect the minus line of each power supply unit as shown in the figure below S Communication cable Special adaptor Analog FX2N FX3u special function blocks Aayeg 7 14 A c 7 14 h l 24V 1 l DC SDD eo Sey ESES 24V DC Bas 25 Oo to 97 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled
290. on of redundant use of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers 116 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 3 Handling of High speed Counters UNO 1 1 phase 1 count input Examples of program N 1 For C235 X010 e C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 33 Te switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on ad e While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction X011 e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or 1 C288 KE up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 YO Count input i Main unit 4 OSs 2 For C244 2 S x010 e C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal i SUT id X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal 2 is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the E EEE Ret C244 Reset indirectly designated data register D1 DO ee eer e C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 Os X012 ee X001 is allocated as the external reset input The counter S S oH resets immediately when X001 turns on 8 O The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or a The SEMAJ Hori tae up count mode by turning on or of
291. onfirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Anywire and ANYWIREASLINK is a trademark of Anywire Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company The company name and the product name to be described in this manua
292. onic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device o When disposing of batteries separate them from other waste according to local regulations For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries refer to Appendix G 8 D TRANSPORTATION AND 3 STORAGE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION E 3 A e When transporting the FX3GC Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation e The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in Section 3 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC e When transporting lithium batteries follow required transportation regulations For details of the regulated products refer to Appendix F 9 g 5 203 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Preparation for Test Operation 10 1 Preparation for Test Operation 10 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or short circuiting of output
293. ons at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companie
294. ormance is required under light loads provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load current e Sink output type e Source output type Dummy Fuse l Load resistance 6 Output current The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5 V When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied element Model Output current Limitation danin YOOO Y001 0 3 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 8 resistance load points is 0 8 A Y002 to Y017 0 1 A 1 point or less so that temperature rise is restrained FX2NC 16EYT DSS 0 1 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 8 resistance load points is 0 8 A or FX2NC 32EYT DSS ale less FX2N 16EYT C 0 3 A 1 point anaes that the total load current of 16 resistance load points is 1 6 A The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Apoints common 0 8 A 8points common 1 6 A FX2N 8EYT H 1 A 1 point sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 2 A or 1 When using an instruction related to pulse train output or positioning make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100 mA 5 to 24 V DC 2 When the two COM1 V0 terminals are connected outside the PLC resistance load is 1 6 A or less Extension blocks FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 0 5 A 1 point FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 7 Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 134
295. out 2 Terminal type FX2NC 16EX T Input terminal FX2nc 16EX T Lower numbers Higher numbers Power connector 1 Red 2 Black 1 Red 2 Black lr r FX2Nc 16EYR T DS Ou tout terminal FX2NC 16EYR T DS Lower numbers Higher numbers 1 For the handling refer to Subsection 3 6 2 Caution A power connector is not included in the FX2NC 16EX T DS FX2NC 16EX T DS Input terminal Lower numbers Higher numbers Slaa d ee hac aa ea We a hag 66 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Terminal Layout 2 2 3 FX2N Series input output extension block O D 1 Terminal type FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX ES UL A om N 25 H SS D Z HI BE oj F ne FX2N a 3 OO ete a3 H OOO O aj Z P T S xl IE xo 4 N gF FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL BL FX2N 8EYT Ss FX2N 8EYT H ndu OW ES SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS FX2N 8ER FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 104 Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN zx 0X ex LX brz
296. pecial function blocks in total can be connected in each system After the FX2NC CNV IF up to 4 I O extension blocks and special function blocks in total can be connected The number of units connectable to the main unit or extension power supply unit is I O extension devices restricted in the following models as shown on the next page D Special function devices lt Example gt FX2NC FX3uc FX2NC FX2N FX2N FX2N FX3u oe me 32EX a SEYR ah IF Up to 4 I O extension blocks and special function blocks in total Up to 2 special function blocks in total 40 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 10 Restriction in number of units in each group Division Contents of restrictions In addition to the restrictions shown on the previous page the number of units connectable to the main unit or extension power supply unit is restricted in the following models Connection target and number of connectable units Model name Main unit Extension power supply unit FX3GC 32MT D FX3UC 1PS 5V 2 FX2NC 16EYR T om 3 as FX2N 8ER o amp oo FX2N 8EYR S p When the FX2NC 16EYR T is not used up to 4 units in total can be FX2N 8EYR S ES UL FX2N 8EYT connected Up to 5 units in total can be EXINSEYTH When the FX2NC 16EYR T is Connected 3 FXON MGEYR used refer to the note below 29 D5 2 2E FX2N 2AD T FX2N 2DA 2 j wn Connection target and number of connec
297. program so that the z setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time D8012 2 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk 4 If the ERR LED goes off noise may have affected the PLC Take the ae following measures ee Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and SS installation location 4 3 Fita noise filter onto the power supply line ss 3 If the ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool Flashing Parameter error For the remedies refer to 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and e Syntax error Representation of Error Codes e Ladder error ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and Off No errors that stop the PLC have occurred program check with the programming tool An I O error Comms error or Runtime error may have occurred indino SUOH eOIJIN9dS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO 9 g 5 211 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes
298. put External power supply 5 to 30 V DC Y000 Y001 0 3 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 8 Y002 to Y017 0 1 A 1 point resistance load points is 0 8A or less FX2NC 16EYT DSS 0 1 A 1 boint Make sure that the total load current of 8 Resistance FX2NC 32EYT DSS p resistance load points is 0 8A or less load The total load current of resistance loads FX2N 16EYT ESS UL p es A4points common 0 8 A 8points common 1 6 A Max load 7 2 W 1 point Y000 Y001 24 V 5c Make sure that the total load of 16 Se aT RT inductive load points is 38 4 W 24 V DC Inductive poin l Y002 to Y017 or less FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 32EYT DSS 2 4 W 1 point 24 V DC FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 12 W 1 point 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA or less 30 V DC ON voltage 1 5 V or less Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC Y002 to Y017 0 2 ms or less 100 mA 24 V DC OFF ON For FX2NC Series 0 2 ms or less 100 mA Extension blocks Response For FX2N Series 0 2 ms or less 200 mA time Y000 Y001 5 us or less 10 mA or more 5 to 24 V DC Y002 to Y017 0 2 ms or less 100 mA 24 V DC ON OFF For FX2NC Series 0 2 ms or less 100 mA Extension blocks For FX2N Series 0 2 ms or less 200 mA Output circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Output operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Output circuit configuration 1 When the two V0 terminals are connected outside the P
299. put wiring Source input wiring 15kQ or 15kQ or more grm more saaaaaamey l H I l H i l i l l i Bleeder Bleeder b resistance l resistance l i l i 24V DC Fse 3 In the case of 2 wire proximity switch Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current Z is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off When the current is larger than 1 5 mA connect a bleeder resistance Rb kQ determined by the following formula as shown in the following figure 6 I 1 5 e Examples of wiring Dedicated to sink input types only 24V E Rb kQ lt Bleeder 2 wire resistance Rb proximity sensor e Examples of wiring Common to both sink and source input types Sink input wiring 2 wire Source input wiring 2 wire IL proximity I proximity Lomi sensor 1 5MA sensor Bleeder resistance l Bleeder resistance uae 24V DC 106 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 5 2 5 Examples of external wiring UNnO 1 Examples of wiring Dedicated to sink input types only FX3GC 32MT D Power connector NO specifications and external wiring DC DC Fuse converter OIN A l Handle the power supply om circuit correctly in 2 l accordance with Chapter aD 4 Power supply S l l gueuey Q g 2 FX2NC extension block Dedicated t
300. r numbers Sg n lt 1 COM2 or COM3 in accordance with connected connector ndu QI 8 8 3 Example of output external wiring a Q F O00 to OO7 Lower numbers A A0 to A A7 Higher numbers 2 PES output m0 123 004567 0123 444567 No 6 DO Relay 85 power supply S Relea i 5 Tipar HIS eos Jl 5 EAE a Eom 1 C81 Ee pow 4 6 Bows 7 lt sm l It Ey inl TH ssi O n2 ee 9 Fuse j 12 24V DC 9 a Buooys jqnosj QOUBUDSIUIC uny SOL 181 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 8 FX 16EYR TB 8 8 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Terminal block 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in the terminal block It is recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product life 1 DC circuit Connect a diode for commutation parallel to the load inductive load The diode for commutation must c
301. rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws T e Accessories Label for indication of O 5 number z 2 e Terminal block M3 screws 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch e The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Aayeg 40 1 58 87 3 43 _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 55 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 1 4 FX2N FX2NC FX3U FX3uC series special function block 1 Analog control FX2N FX3U Series A type MASS Weight kg Ibs 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Approx 0 2 0 44lbs Approx 0 2 5 0 44lbs POWER a moO 0 O E FX2N 4AD PT Approx 0 3 Se FX2N 4AD TC 0 66lbs FX3u 4AD al a Approx 0 4 0 88lbs 9 0 36 Approx 0 4 87 3 43 0 88lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws B type e Accessories Label for indication of 2 44 5 mounting holes special unit block number Unit mm inches Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product e Terminal block M3 screws FX2N 8AD is M3 5 screws e The extension cable is already connected to the extension block O av amrer mer a mea meon Cee Icom e 67 2 64 Le mounting hole pitch 8 0 32 75 2 96 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inche
302. ration 4 e Review the program and check the contents of the Oa M i oe 6708 FROM TO instruction error PATNOS Gece Appice IB AURON o 2 0 e Verify that the specified buffer memories exist in the 2 counterpart equipment Ss Continues e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected a lt operation This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in 5 applied instructions oe Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation ee 6709 Other e g improper branching error may still occur ee For example D T3002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T400 would attempt to be accessed This would cause an operation error since there is no T400 device available This error occurs when the same device is used within the 6 6710 Mismatch among parameters Be cade ci a i source and destination in a shift instruction etc DO 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 os O eer Q 6732 Hears a filter constant a aj 2 lt PID instruction is stopped gt 6733 Incompatible proportional gain KP KP lt 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation 6734 Incompatible integral time T1 TI lt 0 data executing PID instruction 7 aT Check the contents of the parameters 6735 Incompatible derivative gain KD lt sm KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6 c 6736 Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 2 SP D 9 z
303. ration even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100 mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors power connectors or input output connectors Failure to do so may re
304. rect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead Og to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment as Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated F o manuals and ensure the safety of the operation oS N lt An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE EEUE CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino e Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable a Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions z e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions S Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit connector conversion adapter and Battery 7 sgp DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION T e Please contact a certified electr
305. resistance or a __2 two wire proximity switch a 4 j bleeder resistance may be Photocoupler Wj required l OU P E Refer to Subsection 5 2 4 Be SL ES ae out 55 a ah FX3UC 1PS 5V DC DC a Two wir sensor Os Dec OQ a D S gt 02 connector indino FX2N extension block g Common to both sink D and source input types S S 3 Input z terminal D peal Photocoupler a0 i 7 lt XON o a caz Sp 1 A UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 3 47 A must be used with FX3GC BS 2 Class D grounding The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 8 3 Use a fuse suitable for the system a 3 Ww 9 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 109 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 5 V DC Input FX2N 16EXL C 5 3 5 V DC Input FX2N 16EXL C 5 3 1 5V DC input specifications The table below shows the input specifications of the FX2N 16EXL C Item 5 V DC input specifications Input points 16 points Connection type Connector terminal block Input signal voltage 5V DC 5 Input impedance 2 2 KQ Input signal current Max 40 mA 5 V DC Input sensitivity ON Low 1 mA or more current OFF High 0 4 mA or less Input sensitivity ON
306. rm troubleshooting for special adapters 6421 Special parameters setting error special blocks and set special parameters correctly e Set special parameters correctly turn OFF the power and o Q then turn ON the power 9 g 5 215 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Syntax error M8065 D8065 Contents of error Action 6501 Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device number 6502 No OUT T or OUT C before setting value No setting value after OUT T or OUT C 6503 be wi Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction Same label number is used more than once 4 ae oe Stops PAMS Aten BUINPHPOnnIGN EREA COUME IARE USSA MONG During programming each instruction is checked If a syntax than once i operation error is detected modify the instruction correctly 6505 Device number is out of allowed range 6506 Invalid instruction 6507 Invalid label number P 6508 Invalid interrupt input I 6510 MC nesting number error Circuit error M8066 D8066 0000 E s No error 6610 LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 6611 More ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6612 Less ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or
307. rminal block M3 5 screw So The connection with the PLC is the connector a Output type Transistor sink output son External power supply 5 to 30 V DC aon ee Resistance load 0 5 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less ax loa Inductive load 12 W 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30 V DC OFF gt ON 0 2 ms or less 24 V DC Response time ON gt OFF 1 5 ms or less 24 V DC Output element s ON voltage 1 5 V ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation indino d9 O Operation indicators LED lights when photo thyristor power is supplied 3 Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24 V DC D 3 Fuse er 7 lt sm z DESP Input output circuitry M a 2 z9 cas CN1 1 EER Connector side 9 9 External wiring 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 9 a Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 189 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 11 FX 16EYT ES TB UL 8 11 2 Internal circuit Photo 3 3kQ coupler FYETE ONEEN AA 2 13 3 O02 AAO 11 1 O00 Photo coupler O00 to OO 7 Lower numbers A AO to A A7 Higher numbers 0o00 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 141 V1 or V2 in accordance with connected connector 8 11 3 Example of output exte
308. rnal wiring PLC output No 000 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 AA4 5 6 7 8 11 4 External wiring precautions The caution on external wiring is the same as FX 16EYT TB Refer to Subsection 8 10 4 190 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 12 FX 16EYT ESS TB UL 8 12 FX 16EYT ESS TB UL UNO Connect the FX 16EYT ESS TB UL to the output connector in the main unit or extension block shown in the table below Output connector N Connectable models FX3GC 32MT DSS FX2NC LIDEYT DSS The applications shown below are not supported jeu19 x3 Unsupported Applications SUOISUBWUIG Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction Pulse output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction gueuey Q drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction a Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction je Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction g n 8 12 1 Specifications 4 V U Item FX 16EYT ESS TB UL 8 e 0 Terminal block M3 5 screw S o FonnecHon form The connection with the PLC is the co
309. rns off B phase input External start input Y005 turns on down count or off up count according to A phase input External reset the counting direction input Main unit e A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below PhaseA LUNI i410 i 1 1 1 Phase B i K Up counting Down counting e The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 119 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey GO suolyeoljioeds A ddng Jamog A ep O D Q Q a O 5 7 indu SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOHeOIJINedS Joy Bui Jo sejdwexg s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 High speed Counters C235 to C255 5 5 4 Timing of updating of current value and comparison of current value 1 Timing of updating of current value When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high speed counter the high speed counter executes up counting or down counting The current values of devices are updated when counting is input Comparison of current value
310. roduct 4 The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual ou Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual 8 z Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver F does not touch the partition part of the terminal block 5 Nn lt 1 Terminal block screw size and tightening torque The table below shows the screw size of each terminal block For crimp terminals refer to 2 Wire end ndu QT treatment D Product Tightening torque 8 FX2N extension blocks Except for the FX2N 8AD FX2N 16CCL M signal terminal EE E a FX Series terminal block FX2N 20PSU FX2N 8AD FX2N 16CCL M signal terminal M3 5 FX3U extension blocks Refer to the manual for each product 6 2 Wire end treatment DO The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method 8E Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 to 0 8 Nem z Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above mentioned range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures of malfunctions T s i In case of M3 terminal screw a 3 e When one wire is connected to one terminal an Terminal Crimp 3 3 2 0 13 screw _ terminal 6 2mm 0 24 8 or less 3 2 0 13 3 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal or less 9 lt Reference gt 9 Terminal Manufacturer Certification Pressure Bonding Tool y
311. ror has occurred in 2 or more special adapters special blocks OO indicates the lowest unit number among the special adapters special blocks in which an error has occurred Value of L decimal Special adapter special block where an error has occurred 00 Unit number 0 Special block 10 Unit number 1 Special block 20 Unit number 2 Special block 30 Unit number 3 Special block 40 Unit number 4 Special block 50 Unit number 5 Special block 60 Unit number 6 Special block 70 Unit number 7 Special block 81 Communication channel 1 Special adapter 82 Communication channel 2 Special adapter 220 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 7 Troubleshooting 10 7 Troubleshooting UNO For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 10 2 For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices N 10 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks lobe 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device to check its operation Check for troubles with external wiring SUOISUBWUIG e When the output operates gueuey Q W The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program Reexamine the program D Duplicate coil or RST instructions g
312. rounding 0 1A 50V diode is Fuse necessary BCD KOF FX2nc 16EYT DSS FX3cc 32MT DSS Transistor output source 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 152 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 3 Input extension block Output extension block Example of program Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit a sink only input type input extension block and a transistor output sink only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D input extension block FX2NC 16EX output extension block FX2NC 16EYT 24V DC Digital Class D switch of grounding BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary EEEE ee ee EENE Sees O1O Korce COM x020 x021 x022 FX2NC 16EYT Transistor output sink FX3Gc 32MT D 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit a sink source common input type input extension block and a transistor output Source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS input extension block FX2NC 16EX DS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS Digital switch of aoe DC BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary Class D FX2nc 16EYT DSS Source inp
313. rruption or pulse catch perform wiring in reference to the figures below For input allocation in input interruption refer to Section 5 6 For input allocation in pulse catch refer to Section 5 7 For input allocation in pulse width pulse period measurement function refer to Section 5 8 Caution Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 1 NPN open collector transistor output three wire sensor 1 FX3Gc 32MT D 2 Three wire Se sensor 2 PNP open collector transistor output three wire sensor FX3GC 32MT DSS Source input wiring 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 150 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 UNO 7 4 1 When DSW instructions are used N Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below 1 Main unit SUOISUBWUIG lobe Example of program gueuey Q Example of wiring a 1 Sink wiring 3 Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit gt The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT D BS 24V DC Digital Be switch of aa BCD aS 0 1A 50V diode is necessary Class D grounding ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS
314. rs should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices c All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note The term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please c
315. s 82 3 23 mounting hole pitch 82 3 23 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 9 0 36 86 3 39 56 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories FX2NC FX3uc Series Unit mm inches Model name e Installation l i FX3UC 4AD o FX2NC 4AD 19 o e LO o B Kap o E f FX2NC 4DA JP e Accessories 2 Data link and communication functions FX3U 16CCL M 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX3U 16CCL M e Installation POWER e Accessories 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX3u 16CCL M C 7 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 e Terminal block Model name W mm MASS Weight inches kg Ibs 20 2 Approx 0 13 0 80 0 29lbs 20 2 Approx 0 13 0 80 0 29lbs 24 2 Approx 0 13 0 96 0 29lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width only FX2NC 10BPCB1 power crossover cable 0 1 m 0 3 Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product MASS Weight kg Ibs Approx 0 3 0 66lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws Label for indication of special unit block number Dust proof protection sheet Terminal resistor 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated cable 2 resistors for CC Link dedicated high performance cable Manual supplied with
316. s and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion 261 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History Revised History Date 2 2012 5 2012 11 2013 8 2014 4 2015 Revision A 7 a E Description First Edition Ver 2 00 is supported Supports parameter setting in the FX3U 16CCL M Supports accessing the other station from CC Link Special parameter error M8489 and D8489 is added Description of special auxiliary relays and special data registers is added Appendix C The error code for parameter error is added Subsection 10 6 3 The error code for special block error is added Sub
317. s the programming tool must support the write during RUN function such as GX Works2 For the writing function during running refer to Appendix A 2 5 207 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 10 4 Maintenance User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Maintenance 10 4 1 Periodic inspection 1 Battery Life Standard life 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F Part Model FX3U 32BL battery For details on the standard life and recommended replacement frequency refer to Section 9 5 2 Other devices When inspecting the battery check the following points e Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight e Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel e Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Maintenance 10 4 2 Product life of relay contacts UNO The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life N 1 Inductive load Inductive loads gen
318. s FX3GC Series PLCs For inapplicable programming tools and versions refer to Appendix A 2 2 Model name Description GX Works2 Version 1 77F or later of SWLIDNC GXW2 E supports the FX3GC FX 30P Version 1 30 or later of FX 30P supports the FX3GC FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 5 Connection to Programming Tool 1 5 Connection to Programming Tool m ae RS 232C RS 422 cable e Connection cabling Peripheral device connector Connection cabling for extension device RUNO me oe 38 o 2 D D POWER O O n FX3u 64CCL FX 232AWC H 3 RS 232C A RS 422 1p Q 83 D gy 83 SS Special adapter DS FX3U 232ADP MB al RS 232C 5 2 SE thin t Sitnhte ttettetat o gt F D hape of connector or combination with cable No hape of connector or combination with cable USB FX 30P MINI DIN A EJ use cable 8Pin RS 422 FX 20P CABO 6 g9 Py F2 232CAB 1 S 3 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 2 FX3U 232ADP MB D SUB 9Pin RS 232C D i O D SUB 9Pin Fel x 422caB0 a Peripheral device connector USB FX 232CAB 1 USB Mini B connector USB2 0 7 F2 232CAB 2 SSN 9 Peripheral device connector RS 422 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H Do Half pitch MINI DIN 8Pin cep N 14Pin FX 422CAB0 Z g FX3U 64CCL CC Link connection terminal block FX 232CAB 2 Accessing the other station from CC Link is used 8 Sub
319. s I O extension blocks FX2NC FX3UC Series special function blocks DIN rail on special adapter extension power supply unit FX2NC CNV IF FX Series terminal blocks y FX2N Series I O extension blocks FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks DIN rail or direct mounting Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or write debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit connector conversion adapter and Battery 163 UNnO N SUOISUBWUIG jeu19 x3 su ousg Q Suoleoljioeds A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOI EOIJIN8dS Jo Bui jo sejdwe
320. s and special function blocks in total can be connected after the FX2NC CNV IF There is no problem since the components are not changed OK queue Q suoleoljioeds c Other restrictions There is no problem since the components are not changed OK 4 BS 8 The restrictions for the number of input output points the restriction for the 5 V DC power supply a capacity which is within the maximum number of connectable units and the configuration is valid when an extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V is connected instead of an FX2NC CNV IF ndu OW SUOI EOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIINedS Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 47 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration 1 13 Selection Calculation Example 2 for System Configuration When the main unit FX3GcC 32MT D and CC Link master are used 1 Example system configuration FX3U FX3GC FX2Nc FX2Nc FX2NcC FX2NC FX2NC FX2n FX3U 4AD ADP 32MT D FI6EX 16EYT 16EYR T 16EYR TICNV IF 64CL M 16CCL M Terminating Terminating CC Link LT resistor resistor Terminating CL1Y4 T1B2 CL1X4 D1B2 resistor 4 points output units 4 points input units Station No 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Station No 1 Number of occupied stations 1 T
321. s for Ch4 Number of averaging times for Ch4 og 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 s Q D 8298 Error status status Error status status Error status D 8299 Model code K20 e K21 PTW Ce code K10 Model code K11 uonewodsue Aueyeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s Jequiew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey 251 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition D Instruction List D 1 Basic Instructions Appendix D Instruction List Appendix D 1 Basic Instructions Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction LD Initial logical operation contact type NO normally open LDI Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse LDF Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse AND Serial connection of NO normally open contacts ANI Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse ANDF Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse OR Parallel connection of NO normally open contacts ORI Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse ORF Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse Connection Instruction ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits MPS Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations M
322. s from STOP to RUN 236 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 gt i 7 zD Number and Cotrespond Number and Fone pong 5 Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special D 5 name name device device e Advanced Function N N Network M 8160 Mea M 816112 8 bit process mode s M 8181 Not used R B M 8162 High speed parallel link mode 3 M 8182 oe M 8163 p M 8183 Data communication error T Master station D M 8164 T Data communication error M 8165 Not used M 8184 Slave station No 1 M 8166 Dat icati IM 8185 ata communication error M 8167 5 Slave station No 2 _ z M8168 SMOV FNC 13 instruction f vaise Data communication error a HEX data handling function M Slave station No 3 Ss M 8169 Data communication error PSAT O z M 8187 S ation Nod D8218 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN lave canons 2 Applicable to RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 M 8188 Data communication error and CCD FNC 84 instructions Slave station No 5 Data communication error S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds Pulse Catch pane Slave station No 6 M8170 2 Input X000 pulse catch M 8190 Data communication error M 8171 Input X001 pulse catch e Slave station No 7 E M 8191 Data communication in execution M 81723 Input X002 pulse catch
323. saeeeees 85 3 7 1 Input output connector Main unit FX2NC Extension DIOCK cccccceececeeeeceeeeceneeteeeeeeeeeseeeens 85 3 7 2 Terminal block for Europe FX2NC FX3UC extension DIOCK c ccccccceseceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 87 3 7 3 Input Output Terminal Blocks FX2N FX3U Extension DIOCKS cccccceeececeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeseaes 89 3 8 Grounding terminal of the FX3U ENET ADP ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeessaeeeesaaeeeesaaes 91 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring 92 4 1 Selection of the external DC power supply tO Prepare ceccccecccceeccceeececeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeessaeeeesees 94 4 1 1 Power s pply SPECTICANOMS sores a biti seed a aS eee oe 94 4 1 2 The input range of power supply VOITAGE cc ecccceeecccceeceeseeeeeceeeeeseuceeseeecessuecesseeessaeeeeseeeeseasess 94 4 1 3 Power consumption of the extension CQUIPMENL cccccceeccceceeeeeseeececeeeceseeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeas 95 AD EXAM SEXTON VV INNING satan eas eae tle Os eke nn alee helt cia Sat unl ie ae ea bela ha ed tes 96 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring 98 5 1 Sink and source input 24 V DC input type ce ccecceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseseesaeeseeeaeeeeeeas 100 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 2 ae VMOU TY Oedse a a dead 2ae5 d aden atauanaadetentee eats 101 52 T 24V D
324. se output batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Time division input Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 8 10 1 Specifications Item FX 16EYT TB Terminal block M3 5 screw Sates e The connection with the PLC is the connector input type form Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30 V DC eee Resistance load 0 5 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of 4 resistance load points is 0 8 A or less ax loa Inductive load 12 W 24 V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1 mA 30 V DC OFF gt ON 0 2 ms or less 24 V DC Response time ON gt OFF 1 5 ms or less 24 V DC Output element s ON voltage 1 5 V Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Operation indicators LED lights when photo thyristor power is supplied Power consumption 2 7 W 112 mA 24 V DC input output circuitry CN1 Connector side External wiring 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 186 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 10 FX 16EYT TB 8 10 2 Internal circuit UNO N SUOISUBWUIG
325. section 1 5 1 F2 232CAB 3 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H 2 F D SUB 25Pin w ex 422caso S Q F2 232CAB 1 1 The following USB cables are applicable Aayeg Model name Description MR J3USBCBL3M USB cable 3 m 9 10 GT09 C30USB 5P USB cable to transfer personal computer data USB A plug 3 m 9 10 2 When FX 232AW or FX 232AWC is used the communication baud rate is 19 200 bps or less _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuUleN uny SOL 31 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 5 Connection to Programming Tool 1 5 1 The accessing path to the FX3Gc from CC Link The FX3Gc connected to the FX3U 64CCL can be accessed via CC Link from the FX master station FX3U 16CCL M and Q CPU Q mode master local station when GX Works2 is used Accessing permits read write verify device batch monitoring and device test The communication path of CC Link is illustrated as follows For details refer to the manual of GX Works2 1 The path when accessing from the FX3U 16CCL M CC Link PC GX Works2 FX3GC 2 The path when accessing from the master QCPU Q mode station master station FX3GC 3 The path when accessing from a local QCPU Q mode station master station CC Link PC GX Works2 FX3GC Pea nor FX3u 64CCL anges station 1 Direct connection or connection using the GOT transparent mode 1
326. section 10 6 3 The following product is added to Outline Chapter 1 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement Chapter 2 etc Special adapter FX3U ENET ADP Special function block FX3U 128ASL M Ver 2 00 is supported Description of special auxiliary relays and special data registers for FX3U ENET ADP is added Appendix C Ver 2 10 is supported Supports the IP address change function in the FX3U ENET ADP Mention of MODBUS communication is added Description of special auxiliary relays and special data registers for MODBUS communication is added Appendix C One instruction is added ADPRW FNC276 Appendix D 3 Maximum number of input output points when AnyWireASLINK master is used is added Subsection 1 8 3 Errors are corrected Self made power cable is deleted Subsection 3 6 4 Errors are corrected A part of the cover design is changed FX3GC SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN 09R533 JY997D45401E Effective April 2015 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
327. sessaees 156 7 6 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL FNC 74 BCD FNC 18 cccccceecccceeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeeeeees 159 7 6 1 When SEGL mstiuctions are USCC ioc sccgeoictesaghcee nsec odie cee a es 159 7 6 2 When BCD instructions are used cccccccecccceceeceeeeeceeceecaeeeecaueceesaaeeesaaeeesseeeessaesessaaeessaeeeeeesas 161 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring 163 O TOV OVON a a A EEE ER E EEE toe chincsenactias EA E T 165 gT PTOGUEL COM IGUIAUl ON esn A a aueaces wgananadcueasgnamseasene 165 8 2 External Dimensions amp Component Names ccccccccceeccceseecesececeeesaeeceseeeesseeeessueesseeeeesanees 167 5 Temna AEA SIS IN tio ce cise daa ee ed alicia rt rg blade et Levens elec cds tia EATER 168 0 A instalat oN WOK ics a a adentens a tantatastadencteate sie 170 98 4 Mountings REMON alixsosces cos cacy a N E 170 8 4 2 Input output Cable CONNECTION cccecccceeccccseeceeceeceeceeeeeceeeeesseaceeseaeeessaeeessaesessaseeeseeeeseseneeesas 170 94 3 CONMECION1O terminal blok corie a a xe dhe este eave e Ea 171 6 9 EXA TO BX 2E Buro e Aa aa A a A 172 gort ANENA CINCUNN sra a a E Ea EE E 172 8 5 2 Example of input external wiring SINK WIFING cccccccccesseccceeeeceeeeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeesaeeessaeeeeeeas 173 8 5 3 Example of output external wiring SINK WIPING cccccccccssececeeceeeeeeceeeceeeeeeessaeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeas 174 6 6 FX 16E 1 BU BK SZ Be aa a aE E 175 O61
328. shooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 10 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON UNO 10 2 1 Methods of running and stopping N FX3GC PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods Two of the methods can be combined 1 Operation with built in RUN STOP switch Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and stop the PLC refer to the following figure Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will start Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey Q ep ELSE FX3ec 32MT 8 RUN D RUN STOP Switch 8 3 srop 4 4 ___ r Bog 5 5 2 Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal 24 Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal by a parameter setting refer to the figure below When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch e FX3GC 32MT D General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter ndu Q7 SUOI eOIIOedS indino 8 8 aj SEY e FX3GC 32MT DSS Sa 2 O n2 24VDC Fuse 24V DC Fuse GSB 2 S General purpose input General purpose input terminal specified as RUN terminal specified as RUN Fuse inpu
329. short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips nhead screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block e Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual
330. signed to special function blocks as follows when the power is turned ON SUOISUBWUIG 1 Special function blocks connected to the right side of the main unit Unit Nos 0 1 7 are assigned to special function blocks except input output extension blocks from the one nearest the main unit suaus Q 2 Products to which unit numbers are not assigned a e input output extension blocks FX2NC 16EX FX2NC 16EYR etc 3 e Extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V 3 e Connector conversion adapter FX2NC CNV IF FX2N CNV BC e Special adapters FX3U 232ADP MB etc 4 oe 1 15 2 Example of assigning S Ss Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the following configuration For assignment of input output numbers refer to Section 1 14 Special adapter Input output Special Special FX3U 232ADP Main unit extension block function block FX2NC CNV IF function block ndu QT MB FX2NC 16EX FX3UC 4AD FX3U 16CCL M SUOI eOIIOedS Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the above configuration as shown below Unit No Unit No 6 ae ae i hin a fy No 0 ______s No 1 X000 to X017 X020 to X037 ee 22 Special adapter Input output Special Special Q FX3U 232ADP Main unit extension block function block FX2NC CNV IF function block 5 MB FX2NC 16EX FX3UC 4AD FX3U 16CCL M Y000 to YO17 7 sso 1 15 3 Application of unit number labels Saz Cop The special function blocks come with
331. speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below Type of counter Input signal form Counting direction Down count or up count is specified by turning on or off l i UP AILIN M8235 to M8245 1 phase 1 count input DOWN ON Down counting OFF Up counting Up count or down count The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 1 phase 2 count input Automatic up count or down count according to change in input status of phase A B 2 phase 2 count input 1 1 The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to Phase B i M8255 ON Down counting Up counting Down counting OFF Up counting 3 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3Gc PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that an OP input cannot be programmed Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers C248 C248 OP C253 C253 OP C254 C254 OP 4 Cautions in connecting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the h
332. sseeeeseeesesseaeeesseeeseesseeeees 185 8 9 4 External wiring precautions wes szsiekextevexdinstacrsdanctbaiaeatialauagpitdeevavesinatdenerneusstsbenhoesstsvavencnetateanewetend 185 3 9 5 Productlite of relay COntaCisS scnsiirori ar eee an ie eee 185 2 8 J ead me a gt een eer Ce eee eon a oe er eee 186 6 10 1 SSP SCI CANONS redex aecccats ete deee ce ace E sees geese E a 186 OTOL NEMAN ecacciest caidas faces deters a a 187 8 10 3 Example of output external wiring ssccts teh he ote ceeds etd ieee hee hae aek ce ede ee mad aa 187 6 1104 External Wining DFECAUTIONS siraan a a ARa 188 STEFA IOE Y TES aea a a a a a a 189 aed al fed Bago 1 6 02 111 ONS ene ne a a ge ee 189 oI WUC MAIC INCU siete lo ads rdsu agate aecctasedadre e a unseat docsaa eee 190 8 11 3 Ex mple of output extemal Winn aissi is codec a a steerer bad eae de eteaes E EAE 190 8 11 4 External wiring precautions 2 vurccsilectiwctstnavicussadeadeutinctncanswidacbuecwesd ccsiansh teres Cand enesinstobocaitcgansss 190 012 PAGE YTF ESS TB Sk aac aatacianadbaahointeughaaeianeabas aei iraa 191 9 121 SP SCI CANONS ea a e a a a a a ee oe 191 g 122 IMENA C IC E c a i i AA a Eae aee aa eaa a 192 8 12 3 Example Of o tp texternal WINING arer cetsseire n e a ae eat ee 192 8 12 4 External wiring precautions ss5issrceorecctweterdihecendedentetendvu dare dcateresuantrusauniadeetsiaderdy dex tauadwatucastereusiuas 193 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers
333. sult in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 92 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Power Supply Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS c AUTION e Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems e When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunc
334. t EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV Derivative result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 PID operation result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 PID output upper limit set value lt PID output lower limit set Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning operation direction mismatch Action lt Auto tuning is continued gt The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time scan time lt PID operation is continued gt The operation is continued with each parameter set to the Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain KD maximum or minimum value lt Transpose of output upper limit value and output lower limit value gt PID operation is continued gt Check whether the target setting contents are correct lt Alarm output is not given PID operation is continued gt Check whether the target setting contents are correct lt Auto tuning is finished PID operation is started gt e The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less e The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the deviation at start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the start of auto tuning was di
335. t by parameter Fuse input by parameter 8 D D w O For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual s 9 g 5 205 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON Operation with two switches RUN and STOP The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP push button switches For this operation a Sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual e FX3GC 32MT D RUN STOP a e FX3GC 32MT DSS 24V DC Fuse 24V DC Fuse Fuse 7a RUN STOP como xo00 x001 x002 S covo xo00 x001 x002 N SLC inkingut o PLe eourceinput O source input Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN STOP function However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal The remote operation for starting and stopping from the programming software is used in combination with the built in RUN STOP switch 10 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose RUN
336. table units 4 Model name Main unit Extension power supply unit FX3GC 32MT DSS FX3UC 1PS 5V 3 g FX2NC 16EYR T DS i je FX2N 8ER ES UL So BS I O extension devices FX2N 8EYR ES UL When the FX2NC 16EYR T DS is FX2N 8EYR S ES UL not used up to 4 units in total can oS B special finctiamdauicss eod Up to 5 units in total can be 5 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL connected When the FX2NC 16EYR T DS is ns FX2N 16EYR ES UL used refer to the note below ge FX2N 2AD 2 FX2N 2DA 2 1 When the FX2N 2AD or FX2N 2DA is used up to 4 units in total can be connected When the FX2N 2AD or FX2N 2DA is not used up to 5 units in total can be connected 2 Consider the restriction for the number of special function equipment indino 7 O Note that the number of connectable units is restricted for the following special function blocks 8 O Model name Restrictions e Only one FX3U 16CCL M unit can be connected to a single PLC FX3U 16CCL M main unit e It cannot be used together with the FX2N 16CCL M 7 FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single sem PLC main unit aS S e When multiple units are used a remote I O station cannot be a FX2N 16CCL M connected to the second master station or later T a4 e It cannot be used together with the FX3U 16CCL M and FX3U a 128ASL M e Only one FX3U 128ASL M unit can be connected to a single PLC 8 FX3U 128ASL M main unit e It cannot be used together with the FX2N 16CCL M
337. tal number of input output points in remote I O 8 stations 8 points 3 The number of input output occupied points is obtained using the following formula Number of input output occupied points Set value of rotary switch 8 points D 3 A Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj souLeu zuleN uny SOL 27 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 4 List of Products 1 4 4 Special adapters 1 Analog functions Model name Description FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch Voltage current input FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch Voltage current output Number of 5V DC current input output consumption points mA 15 15 2 ch Voltage current input 1 ch Voltage current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch Temperature platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 15 50 to 250 C FX3U 3A ADP 20 4 ch Temperature platinum resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 100 to 600 C 4 ch Temperature ES a Pt1000 Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch Temperature thermocouple input 2 Communication functions Number of 5 VDC current Model name Description input output consumption points mA FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232C communication ro 4 30 FX3U 485ADP MB RS 485 communication pO 20 FX3U ENET ADP Ethernet communication ie 30 1 FX3U ENET ADP is supported in FX3Gc Ver 2 00 or later 1 4 5 Extension power supply unit Model name Drive pow
338. tallation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width only e Accessories 26 2 13 74 2 92 1 FX2Nc LILIEX FX2NC 10BPCB1 power crossover cable 0 1 m 0 3 2 Other models None 14 6 0 58 1 04 0 52 54 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 2 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories 2 Terminal type o Unit mm inches Model nam W mm MASS Weight i ope oe inches kg Ibs FX2NC 16EX T 20 2 Approx 0 15 FX2NC 16EX T DS 0 80 0 33lbs l FX2NC 16EYR T 24 2 Approx 0 2 JTE FX2NC 16EYR T DS 0 96 0 44lbs on 12 e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in an S width only e Accessories 1 FX2NC 16EX T FX2NC 10BPCB1 power crossover gueuey Q cable 0 1 m 0 3 a 2 Other models 8 None S MU 2 1 3 FX2N series input output extension block Bs 1 Connector Terminal type ae Unit mm inches kg Ibs ndu OW FX2N 8ER z FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EX UA1 UL z E FX2N 8EYR 5 A FX2N 8EYT Approx 0 2 FXoN BEX mo FX2N 8EYT H 0 44lbs See S FX2N 8ER ES UL 6 aes QD FX2N 8EX ES UL wee 5880 Qs FX2N 8EYR ES UL Bs FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 35 E FX2N 16EX S FX2N 16EX C D FX2N 16EXL C 4 0 16 FX2N 16EYR 7 43 1 70 87 3 43 Eo Approx 0 3 SEE J FX2N 16EYS eee EE FX2N 16EX ES UL Sp ep FX2N 16EYR ES UL Unit mm inches FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 2 4 5 mounting holes 8 e Installation DIN
339. tem 2 lobe 1 Calculating the current in extension equipment that can receive power from the main unit built in power supply Check whether the current consumption of extension equipment to be connected is not more than the capacity of the main unit built in power supply SUOISUBWUIG l I O extension Special function 3 Main unit is Special adapter KO devices devices vo Proceed to 2 FX3UC 8 When the capacity of the main unit built in power supply 3 is insufficient connect an extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V Fg Select 0 DX or as and Jand proceed to 2 4 MU FX2NC I O FX3UC 1PS 5V FX2N I O Bs FX3UC special function FX3U FX2N special function Sop ae FX2NC special function os N lt 2 Calculating the current in extension equipment that can receive power from the extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V a When only FX3UC FX2NC Series units are connected for extension i i I O extension Special function PASUGAIR SSV C devices devices Proceed to rem santana Jel mde a ndu OQ SUOI eOIIOedS FX2NC I O indino op FX3uUC special function 8 FX2NC special function Rj b When FX3uc FX2NC FX3U and FX2N Series equipment are connected for extension P For connection including the FX3u or FX2N Series extension equipment the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required T E 4 I O extension Special function S Sc Pet C devices devices ZEL Proceed to ____ ao When there are FX3
340. ter bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incorrect handling of the battery may cause heat excessive generation bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead to injury fire or failures and malfunctions of facilities and other equipment Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program CAUTION ee Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 199 203 Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices extension blocks special adapters FX Series terminal blocks extension power supply unit connector conversion adapter and Battery GEE S2fty Precautions uD Read these precautions before use 5 D
341. ters and the filter time can be changed in increments of ims in the range from 0 to 15 ms through special data register D8020 When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified X000 X001 X003 X004 10 us X002 X005 X006 X007 50 us Input sensitivity The main units input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table When DC diodes or resistors are provided at input contacts or when parallel resistors or leakage current are present at input contacts perform wiring in accordance with Subsection 5 2 4 Item X000 to X007 X010 to X017 Input signal voltage 24 V DC 20 15 4 5 mA or more 3 5 mA or more Input sensitivity current ON 45 mAormore OFF 1 5 mA or less 1 5 mA or less 104 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 5 2 4 Instructions for connecting input devices UNO The input current of this PLC is 5 to 7 mA 24 V DC Use input devices applicable to this minute current If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur NO Input number Input current X000 to X007 7 mA 24 V DC gp 3 as X010 to X017 5 mA 24 V DC o amp wn S v D lt Example gt Products of OMRON Type Model name Type Model name Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Oper
342. the above description with a special adapter and perform the procedure as indicated 4 Connect the special adapter fig C to the main unit as shown on the right 5 Slide back the special adapter slide lock fig B of the main unit to fix the special adapter fig C Caution When using the FX3U ENET ADP connect it to the last adapter position leftmost position 78 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension equipment 3 4 3 Connecting method B Main units and Extension units blocks connecting N This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2NC FX3UC Series extension blocks FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V 1 Connection procedure Connecting 2 1 Remove the connecting connector cover A from the right connector ar side of the main unit or existing extension block cover A 35 Qo O suoneaoadg OEIL 2 Pull up the connecting hook 2 of the main unit or existing extension block and connect the hook 1 of the extension block to be added to the connection hole of the counterpart 4 main unit or existing extension block as shown in the figure BE on the right S S RE 3 Pull down the connecting hook 2 of the main unit or SS existing extension block to fix the extension block to be oe added Main unit Extension block ndu
343. the electric wire ends Donot connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Notes about Examples of Wiring For the example of positioning wiring refer to the Positioning Control Edition The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals Product input output specifications Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring Products only for sink input and products both for sink input and for source input are available Products for sink output and products for source output are available of transistor The examples of programmin
344. then sequentially stored in registers up D 8045 1 to D8047 Max 8 points ON state number 6 D 8046 ON state number 7 D 8047 ON state number 8 pisos 4 When M8049 is ON the smallest D 8049 _ number out of active annunciator M8049 On state minimum relay ranging from S900 to S999 is number stored in D8049 D18050 to D18058 41 Executed at END instruction Error Detection Refer to Subsection 10 6 3 for details If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M8060 is set to ON and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 D 8060 Example If X020 is unconnected M8060 BCD converted tfol2 o vous x Device number 10 to 177 1 Input X 0 Output Y D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061 Error code for PC PP communication D 8062 2 error or serial communication error 0 M8062 chO Error code for serial communication 2 D 8063 error 1 ch1 M8063 D 8064 Error code for parameter error M8064 D 8065 Error code for syntax error M8065 D 8066 Error code for ladder error M8066 D 8067 3 Error code for operation error M8067 D 8068 Operation error step number latched M8068 M8065 to 3 D 8069 Error step number of M8065 to M8067 M8067 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN system version D 8103 to D 8107 Not used D 8108 Correspond ing special device Number and name Content
345. ting of GOT 5 Select FXCPU in setting shown below and put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT PLC Module Cc IE Field Ethernet Adapter Setup PLC Mode FxCPU nal Select FXCPU Put a check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode 6 Click the OK button to finish the setting 230 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers A Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition A 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability Appendix A 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability UONELWUOJU UOISJO Appendix A 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability Model name Applicability Remarks ae as 2 5 J E 5 00 PE 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o seoinaq jeloeds O Standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3GC PLC are required For details refer to the GOT manual This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS Contents of restrictions e When connected using standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS which support the FX3G PLC GOT1000 Series Applicable Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX3G PLC e When connected using standard monitor OS communica
346. tion driver and option OS which do not support the FX3G PLC Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs The list editor function for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3GC PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual m F940WGOT Not available The following restriction applies when connected 3g F940GOT F940 Handy GOT Not available Contents of restrictions QD Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges PE F930GOT K Not available ang program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs Q F920GOT K Not available Or applicable models refer to the GOT manual ET 940 For connection using the 2 port interface function refer to Appendix A 5 F The following restriction applies when connected EE Contents of restrictions 3 3 S FX 10DM SETO Not available Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges at a and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs 5 a For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DM USER S MANUAL Q JY992D86401 The following restriction applies when connected G 3g a Contents of restrictions oe FX 10DU Not available It is limited t
347. tion of special memories to input numbers Pulse width Pulse period Ring counter value for Ring counter value for Pulse width Input number Pulse period measurement rising edge falling edge Pulse period 2 measurement flag mode in units of 1 6us in units of 1 6us in units of 10us 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 2 The pulse width which can be measured is a minimum of 10 us and a maximum of 100 s The pulse period which can be measured is a minimum of 20 us and a maximum of 100 s 5 8 2 Cautions for pulse width period measurement function 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 X001 X003 and X004 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers However overlap of input numbers is allowed for input interruptions 2 When the pulse width period measurement function and high speed counters are used together the overall frequency of high speed counters is affected For more details refer to Subsection 5 5 5 3 Make sure that the total frequency of four input channels is 50 kHz or less when using the pulse width period measurement function For details on programming refer to the programming manual 4 Cautions in wiring Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side FX3GC
348. tions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block e Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Donot connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the
349. tis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the
350. tors in 9 3m Cables for connecting the A Series Model 16 point units FX A32E 300CAB 9 10 A6TBXY36 connector terminal block conversion Terminal block side A dedicated D unit and input output connector type connector 2 5m FX A32E 500CAB 16 4 _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 85 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector 3 Connectors for user made input output cables available from Mitsubishi Users should provide electric wires and a pressure bonding tool Applicable electric wire UL 1061 are recommended and tool Our model name parais onpar Electric wire size PEE E NN NST ore made by DDK Ltd made by DDK Ltd Solderless connector AWG28 0 1 mm2 357J 4674D Main body FX2C I O CON for flatcable 10 piece set FRC2 A020 30S 1 27 pitch 20 core 357J 4664N Attachment Housing HU 200S2 001 FX2C I O CON S for bulk wire 5 piece set soideress contat AWG22 0 3 mm4 357J 5538 HU 411S Housing HU 200S2 001 FX2C I O CON SA for bulk wire 5 piece set Scidedees contact AWG20 0 5 mm4 357J 13963 HU 411SA 4 Certified connectors commercially available connectors Connectors made by DDK Ltd shown in item 3 Model name and composition of input output connector 86 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Man
351. tteries to EU member states E Appendix G 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The symbol shown in following figure is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o seoinag jeloeds This symbol to the left is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC EU Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II for battery The symbol to the left indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes m sj pow penuljucosiq Appendix G 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states e To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products 1 Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in the figure above on the batteries devices or their packaging r O Don 5 gt a0 ADS ae a o a O 3 o 2 Explaining the symbol in the man
352. type main unit and a transistor output source only output type output extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS output extension block FX2NC 16EYT DSS FX2NC 16EYT DSS Transistor output Source je Je Je ji fe FX3GC 32MT DSS 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Internal circuit 1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 162 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should
353. ual Hardware Edition 3 7 Connection to Input Output Connector 3 7 2 Terminal block for Europe FX2NC FX3uc extension block UNO WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work N Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product 2 Ki Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or D S wiring work 5 gt op Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION WG os Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual gt Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends 4 Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size N Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 8 z 1 Connection to terminal block Se N lt Terminal block type input output extension blocks for FX
354. uals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices POINT The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Appendix G 3 Regulated FX3Gc Series products 1 Included modules and batteries None FX3GcC Series CPU units do not include batteries when shipped from the factory 2 Batteries to be built in modules spare parts and optional parts Product name Battery type FX3U 32BL Lithium Manganese Dioxide Battery 259 FX3GC Series Program mable Controllers G Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States User s Manual Hardware Edition G 3 Regulated FX3GC Series products MEMO 260 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition Warranty Warranty 1 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gra
355. uct For a detailed explanation refer to this manual ens aie FX3GC Series User s Detailed explanations of the FX3Gc Series PLC ee Manual Hardware Edition JY997D45401 hardware including input output specifications wiring O9R533 this manual installation and maintenance Programming FX3S FX3G FX3GC F X3uU F X3UC Ce d Sedes pace rete Manua Details on sequence programming for the FX3GC p g g JY997D16601 Series including explanations of basic instructions 09R517 volume Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition applied instructions and PLC devices a MELSEC Q L F Structured ies a y Additional Programming Manual SH 080782 Programming methods specifications functions etc 43JWO6 Manual Fundamentals required to create structured programs be FXCPU Structured y Additional Programming Manual JY997D26001 Devices parameters etc provided in structured 09R925 Manual projects of GX Works2 Device amp Common 7 FXCPU Structured 7 Additional Programming Manual JY997D34701 Sequence instructions provided in structured projects of 09R926 Manual wee GX Works2 Basic amp Applied instruction P FXCPU Structured nats 7 Additional Programming Manual JY997D34801 Application functions provided in structured projects of 09R927 Manual GX Works2 Application Functions HFX Series terminal block Supplied FX INPUT AND OUTPUT with TERMINAL BLOCKS JY992D50401 Details on handling
356. ue output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up kept even if the power is turned off 2 1 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Examples of program 1 2 For C246 X011 RST C246 X012 Up counting input a The setting is D3 D2 Down counting input Down counting Up counting input input External reset input Main unit External start input e While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the input terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 switches from OFF to ON e The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when the input terminal X006 turns on The up counting input terminal is X000 and the down counting input terminal is X001 C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 turns on C249 is immediately reset The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 118 FX3GC Series Progr
357. ueuey Q SUOI EOIJINdS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO98dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS 104 Bui m gt lt 3 1e D n s sN SNOEN yoojg jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 Output Specifications and External Wiring 6 1 Transistor Output 6 1 2 Transistor Output Specifications Sink output type The table below shows the output specifications of the FX3GC 32MT D FX2N FX2Nc output extension blocks sink output type Outputs in the main unit are restricted by the simultaneous ON ratio gt Item For the restriction in simultaneous ON ratio refer to Subsection 6 1 4 Transistor output sink specifications FX3GC 32MT D 16 points f FX2N 8EYT H 8 points Number of output points FX2N 16EYT C FX2NC 16EYT 16 points Connecting type Output type form External power supply Resistance load Max load Inductive load FX2NC 32EYT 32 points FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC 16EYT FX2NC 32EYT Connector FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 8EYT H FX2N 16EYT Terminal block Transistor Sink output 5 to 30 V DC Y000 Y001 0 3 A 1 point Make sure that the total load current of Y002 to Y017 0 1 A 1 point 8 resistance load points is 0 8 A 1 or less Make sure that the total load current of octane pare EPON 16 resistance load points is 1 6 A or less FX2N 8EYT FX2NC 16EYT 0
358. uld be 100 Q or less 154 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 2 Input extension block UNO Example of program ST BIN e2xo20 D102 N Example of wiring R 1 Sink wiring T a Sink only input type extension block 2 Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit and a sink only input type input extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT D input extension block FX2NC 16EX 24V DC j Class D grounding suaus Q suoneaoadg gm M A ddng 12mod A SUOI EOIJIO8dS b Sink source common input type extension block Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit a sink source common input type input extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS input extension block FX2NC 16EX DS 24V DC ndu QT SUOI eOIIOedS Class D grounding indino SUOI EOIJIN9dS puso Sink a FX3cc 32MT DSS FX2nc 16EX DS 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit a sink source common input type input extension block The wiring example is the FX3GC 32MT DSS input extension block FX2NC 16EX DS Fuse Class D grounding D 5S 3 2 Q Q Aayeg _ Source ra FX3cc 32MT DSS FXanc 16EX DS 358 Sem B35 1 The gro
359. ume Details on the positioning functions of FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3uU FX3uc Series 09R620 Details on handling the FX 30P Handy Programming Panel When using refer also to the FX 30P Operation manual opara R JY997D34401 Details on the FX 30P Handy Programming Panel volume Operation Manual Other manuals Supplied FX 30P A with JY997D34201 Installation Manual product 09R924 When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed WExtension power supply unit Supplied A With FXsuc 1 PS 5V JY997D12201 Details on handling the FX3uc 1PS 5V extension power i product Installation Manual supply unit WBattery option Supplied A with FX3U 32BL Battery JY997D14101 Details on battery life and handling procedures product 17 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals User s Manual Hardware Edition Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Generic Name and Abbreviation PLCs FX3G Series FX3GC Series FX3U Series FX3UC Series FX2N Series FX2NC Series Main unit Input output extension block FX2N Series input output extension blocks FX2NC Series input output extension blocks Special adapters Communication special adapters Analog special adapters Special function blocks FX2N Series special function blocks FX3U Series special function bloc
360. unding resistance should be 100 Q or less 83 S Q 155 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers Users Manual Hardware Edition 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 7 5 Input Matrix MTR FNC 52 7 5 Input Matrix MTR FNC 52 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions 1 Main unit Example of program Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT D iy laa loge IS necessary j 2 J2 iF AN AN AN AN i AN I 24V DC x001V_X003V_X005V_X007 ClassD X002 X004 X006 grounding Connect pull up resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X007 FX3GC 32M1 D 2 Source wiring oe oe eon x00 x01 K0ez x00 x004 X005 OOE KOO7 X001V_ X003 X002 X005V_ X007 X004 X006 0 1A 50V A i N A i N Sink input Transistor output sink lt e Use the sink source common input source only output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT DSS cERBBERER 0 1A 50V 45 45 42 42 45 42 42 45 diode is VY V VV VY Vv vy 24V DC necessary X001 Y X003Y X005Y X007 Class D x002 X004 X006 grounding Connect pull down resistors 3 3 kQ 0 5 W when using inputs X000 to X007 FX3G6c 32MT DSS 1 X001 X003 X002 X005
361. user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditi
362. ut FX3cc 32MT DSS FXenc 16EX DS Transistor output source 1 The grounding resistance should be 100 Q or less 153 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey Q SUOI EOIJIN8dS A ddng Jamog A SUOI EOIJIO8dS ndu OW SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOH eOIJINedS D D 3 5 v Ww a Q Aayeg O Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Digital Switch DSW FNC 72 BIN FNC 19 7 4 2 When BIN instructions are used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below 1 Main unit Example of program fan eaxoro D102 Example of wiring 1 Sink wiring a Sink only input type main unit Use the sink only input sink only output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3GcC 32MT D 24V DC ij Class D P grounding b Sink source common input type main unit Use the sink source common input source only output transistor output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3cc 32MT DSS 24V DC 101 Class D grounding 2 Source wiring Use the sink source common input source only output transistor output type main unit The wiring example is the FX3Gc 32MT DSS Fuse Class D grounding Source n FX3cc 32MT DSS 1 The grounding resistance sho
363. ut number Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 10 us or more X001 M8171 X002 M8172 50 us or more X003 M8173 10 us or more X004 M8174 X005 M8175 50 us or more 5 7 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers 2 Cautions in wiring Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting cables Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side 125 UNO N SUOISUBWUIG lobe gueuey Q SUOI EOIJIN9dS A ddng Jamog A ep O D Q Q a O 5 7 indu SUOI eOIIOedS indino SUOHeOIJINedS 104 Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 8 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function 5 8 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Four input points in the PLC main unit can be used for the pulse width period measurement function which enables measurement of the pulse width or pulse frequency in units of 10 us For details on programming refer to the programming manual For the wiring refer to Section 7 3 5 8 1 Alloca
364. uts X in the FX3GC 32MT DSS can be wired either for sink inputs or source inputs It is not allowed to use both sink inputs and source inputs together e Caution in selecting model Each input extension block is either sink input type only or sink source common input type It is not allowed to use both types of input extension blocks together 100 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 5 Input Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 24 V DC Input Type 5 2 24V DC Input Type UNO For 5 V DC input FX2N 16EXL C refer to Section 5 3 For AC input FX2N 8EX UA1 UL refer to Section 5 4 NO 5 2 1 24V DC Input Specifications Y 3 Inputs in the main unit are restricted by the simultaneous ON ratio a For the restriction in simultaneous ON ratio refer to Subsection 5 2 2 So 1 Sink input 24 V DC Input Specifications Sink input Item 3 FX3GC 32MT D FX2NC LILIEX T FX2N Input extension blocks LO D Number of input FX3GC 32MT D 16 points FX2N 8ER 4 points 2 onie P FX2NC 16EX T 16 points FX2N 8EX 8 points S z P FX2NC 32EX 32 points FX2N 16EX C 16 points gt Except for the FX2NC 16EX T Connector Except for the FX2N 16EX C Terminal block Input connecting type FX2NC 16EX T Terminal block FX2N 16EX C Connector 4 Input form Sink input ae Input signal voltage 24 V DC 20 15 Bs Input impedance X010 to X017 4 3 KQ S3 FX2NC LIDEX T FX2NC LIDEX T
365. ve the main unit from the DIN rail 3 in the figure on the right SUOI eOIIOedS 5 Push the DIN rail mounting hooks as shown in 4 in the figure below This step is not required for FX2N Series 8 point type I O extension blocks except for the FX2N 8EYR S ES UL and FX2N FX3U Series special indino function blocks a 3 s st 223 Eg D 9 3 3 3 Direct mounting FX2N FX3u extension blocks 8 Only I O extension blocks for FX2N and special function blocks for FX2N FX3u can be installed directly Install them with screw holes M4 in reference to 2 1 External Dimensions MASS Installation Accessories Assure the space of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between units as shown below D w O FX2NC Main unit 32EX B Extension cable eFXoNn 65EC 1 eeu 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 eF XoN 30EC FX2NC CNV IF DIN rail Aayeg or FX3UC 1PS 5V _ uny SOL FX2N CNV BC indicates an M4 screw Bunoousejqnou QOUBUBIUIE 77 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension equipment 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension equipment This section explains how to connect extension equipment 3 4 1 Extension equipment connection configuration The connection method among the main unit I O extension blocks and special function blocks varies depending on the group
366. vice station FX3U 64CCL Remote device station FX2N 32CCL Refer to the manual for each product e CC Link LT Master station FX2N 64CL M Remote I O station Remote device station Refer to the manual for each product indino suoeoyineds Joy Bui jo sejdwexy s sN SNOEN yoog jeuiuua OO Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL 21 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Outline User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 2 Part Names 1 2 Part Names 1 2 1 FX3Gc 32MT D SS 6 No Description No Description 1 Special adapter connecting hooks 8 FX3UC FX2NC extension block connecting hooks 2 Special adapter connecting holes 9 Input LED Special adapter connector cover 10 Output LED 11 FX3UC FX2NC extension block connector When special adapter connector cover is removed 12 Nameplate 13 Power connector for main unit 3 14 Battery cover FX3UC FX2NC extension block connecting connector cover Extension block connector cover 4 Special adapter connector 15 5 DIN rail mounting hooks DIN rail mounting groove 6 DIN rail DIN46277 35 mm 1 38 wide Display LEDs 16 Input connector 17 Output connector 18 Peripheral device connector RS 422 pow Green 19 Peripheral device connector USB RUN Green ERR lt Red 20 RUN STOP
367. wer ON to the main unit a 24 V power failure occurs in a powered extension unit The error occurs if the 24 V power is not supplied for 10 seconds or more after the main power is turned ON I O table creation error CPU error Check the number of the connected special function blocks System configuration error For certain special function blocks the connectable number is limited 214 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation S Contents of error Action code at error occurrence PLC PP communication error D8062 o0 Noer 2 6201 Parity overrun or framing error 6202 Communication character error Check the cable connection between the programming panel 5 Continues PP programming device and the PLC This error may occur 35 6203 i Communication data sum check error Wa i D D operation when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC O 6204 Data format error monitoring Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 6301 Parity overrun or framing error 8 6302 Communication character error go 6303 Communication data sum check error S 6304 Communication data format error e Ethernet communication inverter communication computer link and programming 6305 Ensure the parameters are correctly set according to their 4
368. wires may result in serious damage Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input output devices are wired properly The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC 2 Connect all terminals except the grounding terminal with a crossover wire in the PLC single unit 3 Measure the voltage between the crossover wire and the grounding terminal Dielectric withstand voltage 500 V AC for 1min Insulation resistance 500 V DC 5 MQ or more 10 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector power ON PLC STOP Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on Check the program Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the programming tool Transfer the sequence program Write the program to the PLC with the programming tool Verify the sequence program Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC Execute PLC diagnosis Check for errors in the PLC main unit with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with the GX Works2 refer to Section 10 6 204 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Trouble
369. witching Ch2 M 8296 Output hold mode cancel M 8297 Output hold mode cancel Ch4 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used Output mode switching Ch1 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Ch2 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Output mode switching Ch4 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch1 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch2 Not used M 8298 Not used Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 3 Analog special adapters special devices Operation and function FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP vonage From first product From first product From first product Versions 1st analog special adapter M 8280 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection M 8281 Type K J switching Input sensor selection PAo EEL mj LAEE OET M 8290 Temperature unit selection M 8291 Input sensor selection Number 249 gt UONEWUOJU UOISJO SOULWIOJIOd W Ww O O h O O gt N 0008d 0008IN S17 UORONJSU o saoinaq jeloeds m sj pow penuljuocosiq uonewodsue Aueyeq 10 suonnesalg TI G s e s Jequiew na u seeyeq jo Buljpuey FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers C Operation of Special Devices User s Manual Hardware Edition C 3 Analog special adapters special devices
370. xtension cable on the downstream side 3 in the right figure Upstream i Downstream 4 Fit the upper cover and the lower cover 4 in the right SS i extension table figure and press down the upper cover until itis FXoN 65EC hooked 80 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Generic Specifications Installation Work User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 4 Connection between main unit and extension equipment 3 4 6 Connecting method E Connection of FX3Uc 1PS 5V FX2Nc CNV IF to right side This subsection explains the procedures for connecting the extension cable to the extension power supply unit FX3UC 1PS 5V or the connector conversion interface FX2NC CNV IF 1 Connection procedure 1 The connector cover A of the FX3UC 1PS 5V is removed as shown in the figure to the right The FX2NC CNV IF does not have a connector cover Connector 2 cover A FX3UC 1PS 5V R Downstream 2 Connect the extension cable as shown to the right N extension cable awa N Fx3uUC 1PS 5V or 7 Quy E FX2NC CNV IF g 2 Caution on the FX3uc 1PS 5V Only one connector can be used to attach extra equipment to the FX3UC 1PS 5V When the FX2NC FX3UC extension connector on the When the FX2N FX3U extension block connector on right side of the FX3UC 1PS 5V is being used the top of the FX3UC 1PS 5V is being used Extension cable Extension
371. xy sesp SNOEN Aayeg _ Buooys jqnosj QOUBUBIUIE uny SOL FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Terminal Block Specifications and External Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARN ING e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product e Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out e Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems e When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a
372. your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 10 5 2 ALM LED on off State of LED State of PLC Remedies On The battery voltage is low Immediately replace the battery Refer to Section 9 3 1 Off The battery voltage is higher than the value set with D8006 Normal For details on the battery refer to Chapter 9 210 FX3GC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 10 5 3 ERR LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC Remedies 1 Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have occurred Take any of the following measures UNO N Review the program 2 Ki The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the D 2 setting D8000 of the watchdog timer gL Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not D being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 50 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions suaus Q A watchdog timer error may have occurred Add some WDT instructions to the program and reset the watchdog 3 On or the hardware of the PLC may be timer several times in one scan 2 damaged Change the setting of the watchdog timer S Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

to the SHAR 3-in-1 Clip Metro-Tuner`s  Introducción rápida a la computadora VAIO®  Miele S5981 User's Manual  USER`S MANUAL XP1000  Especificaciones Cortas_ENERO 2015  dossier de candidature Agenda 21 local France - DRIEE Ile-de  WFT-E2 II  Consulter la bibliographie de C. Bergeret  Manual para computadores de mão Palm Zire 71  ASUS Z97 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file